Home

Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation, Operation, and Service Manual

1. D 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 D 3 View and Edit SCSI Drives Slot Channel Size MB Speed LG DRV Global Spare Local Spare Vendor and Product ID Appendix D Record of Settings D 5 D 4 View and Edit SCSI Channels Secondary Controller SCSI Channel Mode Host Drive Primary Controller SCSI IDs IDs D 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 D 5 View and Edit Peripheral Devices D 5 1 View System Information Firmware version Boot record version Serial number Appendix D Record of Settings D 7 D 6 Save NVRAM to Disk and Restore From Disk Update Save NVRAM to Restore NVRAM Firmware Date Disk or File Date Location From Disk Date D 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX E Cable Pinouts This appendix identifies the pinouts for each connector used in the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays Topics covered are a RJ 45 Connector on page E 1 a DBI COM port on page E 2 E 1 RJ 45 Connector 1 8 FIGURE E 1 Ethernet RJ 45 Socket 10 100 BASE T TABLEE 1 Ethernet RJ 45 Pin Descrip
2. M Bos Expansion unit 1 i ae act ae i ees actuary oo o Expansion unit 2 we N Loop A left side drive ports Loop B right side drive ports Cable to drive Cable to host FIGURE 4 18 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Attached to Two Hosts and Two Expansion Units Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 23 RAID array GB ONLY T z esi os O Eo oAo oAo oBo oBo Expansion unit 1 Sa r b ar M eye we Oa GP op Loop A left side drive ports Expansion unit 2 we o e 2 GB ONLY an E me ore gag eAg 8 Cable to drive Loop B right side drive ports Cable to host FIGURE 4 19 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Attached to Two Hosts and Two Expansion Units 4 24 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 10 1 Scaling a Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array Into a High Capacity Configuration Note High capacity Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC array configurations are supported with certain limitations For example only the sequential cache optimization mode can be used Other important limitations may exist A Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array with more than two expansion units is a high capacity configuration A Sun StorEdge 3511 FC a
3. Is either power cooling Yes gt FRU LED Yes Replace FRU amber End Replace chassis Secure the ribbon cable End Notes Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 21 3C Front panel LEDs problem FC i Is Temp LED amber Is event LED amber Yes gt Is Fan LED amber also Yes 4 Follow procedure for Fan LED amber on 9B Resolved Check for any amber LEDs in back panel VO Controller module LED amber Yes Go to 4A Noy gt Check temperature in Event Log messages Battery module LED amber Yes y Is the ambient temp within environmental limits Yes x Check that LED ribbon cable in right ear is not loose No Replace chassis Resolved Yes Replace battery module Notes 55 degrees Celsius equals 131 degrees Fahrenheit Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array FIGURE 9 7 Front Panel LEDs Flowchart 3 of 4 9 22 Sun S
4. 4 Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired LUN and press Return to select it Note A device must be mapped to LUN 0 as a minimum A list of available logical drives is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN LU LD DRU Partition Size lt MB gt RAID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes O HLN SB H FL LU RAID Size lt MB gt r eS a PO 28E4A83F NA 34476 GOOD S CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Contr 3 Edit Host ID WWN Name List Status qecuc cce Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 45 5 Select a logical drive LD The partition table is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN LU LD DRU Partition Size lt MB gt RAID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes LG ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status 0 LN SB FL NAME eecuce cece 6 Select a partition A menu displays Map Host LUN and Create Host Filter Entry lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes Map Host LUN CHL ID 46 Primary Control Create Host Filter Entry CHL 1 ID 42 lt Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 46 lt Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Name List ecunececece 7 Choose Create Host Filter Entry Add from current device list lt Main Menu gt Quick inst
5. Replace bad power supply Continue with 1B FIGURE 9 1 Power Supply or Fan Module Flowchart 1 of 2 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 15 1B Power supply or fan proble iy Power supply module LED amber seated and the power Is the power cord connected NO Plug it in Yes Is the Y Resolved No y power supply module completely No gt switch turned on Reseat the module and turn on the switch Yes Resolved No v Is the fan spinning No Try a known good power supply module in that slot Yes End End Resolved Replace chassis Power supply is working properly green LED Notes When a power supply fails the fans will continue to operate because their power is pulled from a power bus on the midplane Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array Refer to FRU Installation Guide for instructions FIGURE 9 2 Power Supply or Fan Module Flowchart 2 of 2 9 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Yes End 9 9 2 Drive LEDs Before you perform the drive LED troubleshooting procedures you might want to use the firmware application to identi
6. Logical drives logical Volumes Host luns scsi Drives Scsi channels Configuration parameters Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs FIGURE 6 2 Firmware Main Menu Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 3 2 6 1 2 2 Proceed to configure the array using options from the Main Menu as described in the rest of this chapter The firmware procedures use the term Choose as a shortcut description Quotation marks are used to indicate a specific menu option or a series of menu options Procedure Meaning Choose menu option Highlight the menu option and press Return or Press the key that corresponds to the capitalized letter in the menu option if one is available Choose menu option 1 menu op This represents a series of nested menu options tion 2 gt menu option 3 which are selected with arrow keys Press Return after each selection in order to access the next menu item and to complete the series Checking Available Physical Drives Before configuring disk drives into a logical drive you must know the status of physical drives in your enclosure From the Main Menu choose view and edit scsi Drives A list of all the installed physical drives is displayed Slot oni ID Size lt MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G 34732 200MB ON LINE SEAGA
7. Product Safety Standard Electromagnetic Interference Test Harmonics Emissions Voltage Flicker ESD RF Field Electrical Fast Transient Burst Surge RF Conducted Power Frequency Magnetic Field Voltage Dip and Interruption Standard N 61000 3 2 2000 No Limits N 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 No Limits N 55024 8kV Contact 15kV Air N 55024 10V m N 55024 1kV I O 2kV Power N 55024 1kV I O 1kV Power L L 2kV Power L G N 55024 3V I O and Power N 55024 N A monitors only mmHmmwmhwtwim fF N 55024 0V 0 5cycle 70 V 0 5sec OV 5sec A 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only A single Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array can be connected directly to certain Solaris operating system hosts This appendix describes the use of Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays Note Sun StorEdge 3511 FC does not support the use of JBOD arrays The topics covered in this appendix are Supported Configurations JBOD Arrays on page B 2 Supported Operating Systems JBOD Arrays on page B 2 Supported Host Platforms and Connection Methods JBOD Arrays on page B 2 Known Limitations Affecting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays on page B 3 Using Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Monitoring and Management Tools with JBOD Arrays on page B 4 Setting th
8. lt Back Cancel Appendix G Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server G 9 12 Click Finish The new partition is formatted and the formatted partition is identified as NTFS in the Computer Management window io Action view lamala oe Healthy System 8 46 GB M gt Tree Partition Basic NTFS Computer Management Local K System Tools a Event Viewer aS H System Information lt BDisk 0 41 4 Performance Logs and Alerts Basic c 44 Shared Folders ees 8 46 GB NTFS a A Online Healthy System a Device Manager E 5 Local Users and Groups yj Storage New Yolume E Sy Disk Management 3 90 GB 3 90 GB NTFS g Disk Defragmenter Healthy E Logical Drives K i 2 2 Damawahla Skarana zl BB Primary Partition 13 Repeat Step 5 through Step 12 for any other new partitions and devices you want to format G 4 Determining the World Wide Name for Windows 200x Servers and Windows 200x Advanced Servers Before you can create host filters you need to know the world wide name WWN for the FC HBA that connects your host to your FC array 1 Boot a specific host system and note the BIOS version and HBA card models connected to your host 2 Access the HBA card s BIOS with the appropriate command alt g or control a are commonly used If the host has multiple HBA cards select the card that is connected to the sto
9. COM1 Properties i 21x Fort Settings Bits per second s00 Data bits fs o M Parity Noe S Stop bits i Flow control EEIE w Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 8 To save the connection and its settings choose File Save The connection file name is connection name where connection name is the name you gave this HyperTerminal connection in Step 4 9 To make a connection shortcut on your desktop choose Start Find For Files or Folders Enter connection name and click the Search Now button Highlight and right click on the file name in the Search Results window choose Create Shortcut and click Yes You are now ready to configure your array G 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 G 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server To access the array from a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server through a serial port use the HyperTerminal connection you configured in Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page G 2 or install a VT100 terminal emulation program and use the parameters described there To access the array through an Ethernet connection follow the procedures in Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 To access the command prompt described there from a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server perform this step Ch
10. Temperature Sensors TABLE 8 6 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Temperature Sensor Locations Element ID Description 0 Drive Midplane Left Temperature Sensor 1 1 Drive Midplane Left Temperature Sensor 2 2 Drive Midplane Center Temperature Sensor 3 3 Drive Midplane Center Temperature Sensor 4 8 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 4 7 TABLE 8 6 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Temperature Sensor Locations Element ID Description Drive Midplane Right Temperature Sensor 5 Drive Midplane Right Temperature Sensor 6 4 5 6 Upper IOM Left Temperature Sensor 7 7 Upper IOM Left Temperature Sensor 8 8 Lower IOM Temperature Sensor 9 9 Lower IOM Temperature Sensor 10 10 Left PSU Temperature Sensor 11 11 Right PSU Temperature Sensor 12 Identifying Fans You can view the status of SES components including the pair of fans located in each fan and power supply module A fan is identified in the SES Device menus as a cooling element Perform the following steps to view the status of each fan Choose view and edit Peripheral devices gt View Peripheral Device Status gt SES Device Cooling element Select one of the elements element 0 1 2 or 3 Normal fan speeds are indicated by numbers 1 through 7 indicating speeds in the normal range of 4000 to 6000 RPM The number 0 indicates that the fan has stopped If a f
11. 6 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 1 8 1 6 1 8 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Default Configurations For a 12 drive array the RAID array is preconfigured as follows a Two RAID 5 logical drives consisting of five physical drives each m Two global spares For a 5 drive array the RAID array is preconfigured as follows a One RAID 5 logical drive consisting of four physical drives m One global spare Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Default Configurations For a 12 drive array the RAID array is preconfigured as follows a Two NRAID logical drives consisting of one physical drive each No global spares For a 5 drive array the RAID array is preconfigured as follows m One NRAID logical drive consisting of one physical drive No global spares NRAID is a collection of physical disk members into a logical drive allowing the firmware application Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or the Sun StorEdge CLI to connect in band Once connected these applications can be used to set the system IP address and create the initial RAID configuration Caution NRAID is not a redundant RAID option If a disk fails in an NRAID configuration all data will be lost The following table highlights the RAID levels available TABLE 6 6 RAID Level Definitions RAID Level Description NRAID NRAID stands for Non RAID It is only used as a default configuration for the Sun StorEdge
12. Viewing Event Logs on the Screen on page 8 18 8 4 1 Logical Drive Status Table To check and configure logical drives from the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs A Ce 34476 GOOD 75540984 Na RAID1 34476 pee ee 8 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 8 3 shows definitions and values for logical drive parameters TABLE 8 3 Parameters Displayed in the Logical Drive Status Window Parameter LG ID LV RAID SIZE MB Status LN INITING INVALID GOOD DRV FAILED FATAL FAIL REBUILDING DRV ABSENT INCOMPLETE Description Logical drive number PO Logical drive 0 of the primary controller where P primary controller and 0 logical drive number S1 Logical drive 1 of the secondary controller where S secondary controller and 1 logical drive number Logical drive ID number controller generated The logical volume to which this logical drive belongs NA indicates no logical volume RAID level Capacity of the logical drive in megabytes Logical d
13. command These commands first halt all I O activity and then write the contents of cache to the drives Power off both power supply fan modules See Power On Sequence on page 4 29 for information about turning the array back on 4 30 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER 5 Configuration Overview This chapter highlights the tools and the important limitations and guidelines which must be understood prior to configuring your array This chapter covers the following topics m Controller Defaults and Limitations on page 5 2 Planning for Reliability Availability and Serviceability on page 5 2 Dual Controller Considerations on page 5 2 Single Controller Considerations on page 5 4 Write Back and Write Through Cache Options on page 5 5 a Software Management Tools on page 5 5 a Out of Band Connection on page 5 5 a In Band Connection on page 5 6 m Summary of Array Configuration on page 5 6 Point to Point Configuration Guidelines on page 5 9 A SAN Point to Point Configuration Example on page 5 10 A DAS Loop Configuration Example on page 5 16 Connecting Two Hosts to One Host Channel Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array only on page 5 20 m Larger Configurations on page 5 21 Subsequent chapters in this manual describe further procedures used to complete the installation and configuration of the arra
14. 5 18 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 3 Map the logical drive each server is using to the controller channels that the server is connected to DAS configurations are typically implemented using a fabric loop FL_port mode A loop configuration example is described under A DAS Loop Configuration Example on page 5 16 Fabric loop FL_port connections between a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array and multiple servers allow up to 1024 LUNs to be presented to servers For guidelines on how to create 1024 LUNs see Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only on page 6 37 Perform the following steps which are described in more detail later in this manual to set up a DAS loop configuration based on FIGURE 5 3 and FIGURE 5 4 Check the location of installed SFPs Move them as necessary to support the connections needed You need to add SFP connectors to support more than four connections between servers and a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array For example add two SFP connectors to support six connections and add four SFP connectors to support eight connections Connect expansion units if needed Create at least one logical drive per server and configure spare drives as needed Create one or more logical drive partitions for each server Confirm that the Fibre Connection Option is set to Loop only Do not use the Loop preferred otherwise point to poi
15. F370 6775 01 BOX 2U SATA Chassis Backplane RAID JBOD F370 6773 01 I1 O RAID CONT SATA 1GB BAT 2U F370 5540 01 CABLE FC 1 5 FT EXPANSION F370 5545 01 BATTERY SATA 2U F370 6774 01 I O JBOD SATA 2U F370 6776 01 AC PWR SUPPLY FAN MOD 2U F370 6798 01 DC PWR SUPPLY FAN MOD 2U F540 6180 01 DRIVE MOD 250 GB SATA 7200 RPM F370 5537 01 I O w SES amp RAID CONT FC 1 GB MEMORY BATTERY 2U XTA 3000 AMBS AIR MANAGEMENT SLED XTA 3310 RK 19S RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET 22 28 XTA 3310 RK 19L RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET 287 36 XTA 3310 RK 19C RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET TELCO CENTER MNT XTA 3310 RK 19F RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET TELCO FRONT MNT 3 3 Customer Provided Cables Customers must provide a minimum of one fiber optic cable per host to connect a host to a RAID array Two fiber optic cables are required for a redundant path configuration To obtain qualified cables consult your Sun sales representative 3 4 Mounting Your Array in a Rack or Cabinet Refer to Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Rack Installation Guide for instructions on how to install and prepare a rack or cabinet for mounting your array Chapter 3 Unpacking Your FC Array 3 5 3 5 Converting a JBOD to a RAID Array If you want to convert a JBOD into a RAID array refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide 3 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 CHAPTER 4 Connecting Yo
16. Off Clean cache Blinking green Dirty cache indicates if data is in memory and is not written to disk yet Solid amber Active link Off Inactive connection 7 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 7 3 I O Controller Module and Battery Module LEDs Continued LED Purpose LED Color Definition Ethernet link Status of Ethernet Off Active connection on inactive controller inactive controller link or inactive connection Ethernet active Status of Ethernet Flashing green Busy activity RAID controller Status of controller Blinking green Good primary controller on I O controller Solid green Good secondary controller module Solid amber Failed RAID controller or I O module SFP link L SFP link status Solid green Active good FC Connection Off Empty or failed FC connection SFP speed S SFP speed status Solid green 2 Gbit Off 1 Gbit Note The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays Ethernet link LEDs differ from the Ethernet link LED found on a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array On the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays a connected port s Ethernet link LED glows solid amber only on the active controller because the Ethernet port on an FC array is considered active only if its controller is active On an inactive controller a port s Ethernet link LED is off whether the port is connected or not The absence of a solid amber
17. This appendix provides tables for recording configuration data Topics covered are View and Edit Logical Drives on page D 2 LUN Mappings on page D 4 View and Edit SCSI Drives on page D 5 View and Edit SCSI Channels on page D 6 View and Edit Peripheral Devices on page D 7 Save NVRAM to Disk and Restore From Disk on page D 8 In addition to saving the configuration data in NVRAM to disk keeping a hard copy of the controller configuration is also recommended This speeds the re creation of the RAID in the event of a disaster The following tables are provided as a model for recording configuration data Note The configuration data in the NVRAM should be saved to disk or file whenever a configuration change is made D 1 D 1 View and Edit Logical Drives D 1 1 Logical Drive Information Disk RAID Reserved LG ID LV Level Size MB Status o LN SB FL Name Space D 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 D 1 2 Logical Drive Partition Information LG Partition Size MB r O Partition Size MB Appendix D Record of Settings D 3 D 2 LUN Mappings Host Channel Pri Sec Controller SCSI ID LUN Logical Drive Logical Volume Partition Size
18. view and edit logical Volumes CHL ID 46 Primary Controller CHL 1 ID 42 lt Secondary Controller CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Controller CHL 5 ID 46 lt Secondary Controller gt Edit Host ID WWN Name List ecuccce Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 3 If the Logical Drive and Logical Volume menu options are displayed choose Logical Drive lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes v CHL ID 46 Primary Controller Cc ary Controller C y Controller C Logical Volume jary Controller E me List The LUN table is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns m CHL ID 46 lt Primary Control eecucece 4 Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired LUN and press Return to select it Note A device must be mapped to LUN 0 as a minimum A list of available logical drives is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN LU LD DRU Partition Size lt MB gt RAID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes O HLN SB H FL LU RAID Size lt MB gt r eS a PO 28E4A83F NA 34476 GOOD S CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Contr 3 Edit Host ID WWN Name List Status qecuc cce Chapter 6 First Time Co
19. Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Summary of Array Configuration on page 5 6 Note If you want to create 1024 LUNs in loop mode you need eight logical drives with each having 128 partitions For redundancy across separate channels you can also create a logical drive containing drives distributed over separate channels You can then partition each logical drive into several partitions Drive channel 0 to other drives on loop to other drives on loop Drive channel 1 36 GB ID6 ID1 ID14 Global spare Local spare for LD1 RAID 5 RAID 3 Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 FIGURE 6 3 Example of an Allocation of Local and Global Spare Drives in Logical Configurations Note To reassign drives and add additional local or global spare drives on your preconfigured array you must first unmap and then delete the existing logical drives and then create new logical drives For more information about deleting a logical drive see Deleting Logical Drives on page 6 19 6 22 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Create a logical drive with the following steps 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logic
20. Controller maintenance gt Restore nvram from disks A confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Choose Yes to confirm lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view an view an It will take effect after resetting controller Restore NURAM From Disks m D vj M A Yes No c R ESTES S Controller maintenance A prompt notifies you that the controller NVRAM data has been successfully restored from disks Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 21 8 6 Upgrading Firmware From time to time firmware upgrades are made available as patches that you can download from SunSolve Online located at http sunsolve sun com Each patch applies to one or more particular piece of firmware including Controller firmware Drive firmware SES firmware PLD firmware SunSolve has extensive search capabilities that can help you find these patches as well as regular patch reports and alerts to let you know when firmware upgrades and other patches become available In addition SunSolve provides reports about bugs that have been fixed in patch updates Each patch includes an associated README text file that provides detailed instructions about how to download and install that patch But generally speaking all firmware downloads follow the same steps Locating the patc
21. Default configurations do not include an SFP connector in every SFP port You might want to add or rearrange SFPs depending on the configuration mode loop or point to point number of planned host connections the necessary number of redundant connections to hosts and the number of expansion units needed The supported SFP is a single port optical SFP transceiver for multimode short wave or single mode long wave use It is compatible with the Small Form Factor Pluggable Multi Sourcing Agreement MSA Sep 2000 and 1x and 2x Fiber Channel The optical connector used is the low profile LC connector SFPs are Sun field replaceable units FRUs and can be ordered from Sun Microsystems These SFPs have been selected and tested to provide the necessary reliability and performance SFPs from other vendors are not supported To review various configuration options see the discussions following Summary of Array Configuration on page 5 6 Refer also to the configuration options presented in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for your array In dual controller arrays SFPs are initially plugged into one of each pair of host and drive ports The default port connections are m The upper I O controller module has SFPs in the FCO FC2 and FC4 ports Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 15 a The lower I O controller module has SFPs in the FC1 FC3 and FC5 ports This configuration provides connections to a
22. F A N Host ID WWN Caution Be sure that you edit the WWN correctly If the WWN is incorrect the host will be unable to recognize the LUN b To edit the WWN Mask use the arrow keys to highlight Host ID WWN Mask and press Return Type the desired changes and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns CHL ID 40 Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 lt Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List ana Parietal Siar wo Map Host LUN Create Host Filter Entr Logical Drive Partition Host IDAWWN 6x6000006000323542 Host ID AWWN Mask xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Host ID WWN Mask _ c To change the filter setting use the arrow keys to highlight Filter Type and press Return At the confirmation screen choose Yes to exclude or include the Host ID WWN selection and press Return ecucecce Configure Filter Type to Include to grant LUN access to the host identified by the WWN and WWN Mask Select Exclude to deny the identified host LUN access 6 48 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Note If no host has been granted access to the selected LUN by having its Filter Type set to Include all hosts can access that LUN In this configuration you can
23. FC nodes together m Point to point The point to point protocol is straightforward doing little more than establishing a permanent communication link between two ports m Arbitrated loop The arbitrated loop protocol creates a simple network featuring distributed arbitrated management between two or more ports using a circular loop data path Arbitrated loops can support more nodes than point to point connections The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays support both point to point and arbitrated loop protocols You select the protocol you prefer by setting the desired Fibre Channel Connection Option in the Configuration parameters of the firmware application see Summary of Array Configuration on page 5 6 FC Topologies The presence or lack of switches establishes the topology of an FC environment In a direct attached storage DAS topology servers connect straight to arrays without switches In a storage area network SAN topology servers and arrays connect to an FC network created and managed by switches Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for your array to see information about optimal configurations for site requirements Chapter 1 Product and Architecture Overview 1 9 1 4 3 Fibre Hubs and Switches A storage network built on a Fibre Channel architecture might employ several of the following components Fibre Channel host adapters hubs fabric switches and fibre to SCSI bridges m F
24. FC JBOD arrayst Sun 1 StorEdge 3510 FC array only Connection options e Serial port Ethernet e Fibre Channel Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Supported RAID levels 0 1 3 5 1 0 3 0 and 5 0 Redundant field replaceable e Power supply and fan modules units FRUs e I O controller modules and I O expansion modules e I O expansion modules e Battery board module e Disk drive modules Configuration management and In band Fibre Channel ports enclosure event reporting e Out of band 10 100 BASE T Ethernet port optionss e RS 232 connectivity e Enclosure monitoring by SCSI Enclosure Services SES 1 GHz drives are not supported A disk array with no controller Each expansion unit has two Fibre Channel loops that can provide redundant data paths back to the RAID array A disk array with no controller that is connected directly to a host computer with no RAID array in the loop Only Sun StorEdge 3510 support the JBOD configuration The host based Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software provides a graphical user interface GUI and ad ditional event reporting capabilities RAID or JBOD Expansion Unit Identification on Chassis A label on the bottom lip of an array chassis underneath the front bezel indicates whether it is a JBOD array or a RAID array For instance 3510 AC JBOD refers to an alternating current version of a 3510 JBOD array 3510 DC JBOD refers to a direct current version of a JBOD arr
25. ID 40 Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 ID 4 lt Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List Host I D WWN 6x66666689066323542 Map Host LUN Create Host Filter Entr ecucecece 10 Review the filter configuration screen Make any changes necessary by using the arrow keys to select an item and then pressing Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns CHL ID 40 Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 ID 4 lt Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List Logical Drive Partition Host ID AWWN 6x6666606600323542 Host IDAWWN Mask xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Filter Type Include Access Mode Read Write Name Not Set ecucece Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 47 a To edit the WWN use the arrow keys to highlight Host ID WWN and press Return Type the desired changes and press Return Main Menu gt Quick malada view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Uolumes view and edit Host luns v CHL ID 40 lt Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List Logical Drive Partition Host ID AWWN x66606606600323542 H ecucec
26. No gt failure Replace chassis Yes End End Notes Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array FIGURE B 5 JBOD or Expansion Unit Troubleshooting Flowchart 2 of 2 B 18 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 B 12 Converting a JBOD to a RAID array If you have an FC JBOD and want to convert it to an FC RAID array refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide for instructions Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 19 B 20 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX C Failed Component Alarm Codes This appendix describes failed component alarm codes au Failed component alarm codes use Morse code dot and dash characters The dot is a short tone sounding for one unit of time The dash is a long tone sounding for three units of time Alarms also referred to as beep codes are presented in a sequence starting with the critical component failure alarm which alerts you to a component problem or failure or a firmware mismatch This alarm is then followed by alarms for whichever components or assemblies have failed Once the beep code sequence is complete it repeats To understand the beep codes listen to the sequence o
27. channels 0 1 4 and 5 are host channels so you can directly connect an array to four host computers SFP connectors are plugged into channels 0 and 4 on the upper controller and channels 1 and 5 on the lower controller for this purpose You can connect two additional host computers to channels 0 and 1 of a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array To support six host computers however you need to insert SFPs in the four unpopulated host ports Except for some clustering configurations when you connect two hosts to channel 0 or channel 1 on a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array you must use host filtering if you want to control host access in this configuration Refer to the user documentation for your clustering software to determine whether the clustering software can manage host access in this configuration 4 28 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 If you want to connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array to more than four host computers or connect a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array to more than six host computers without changing the default configuration you can connect these four host channels to ports on storage switches in a storage area network SAN configuration When a fabric switch is connected to one port of channel 0 or channel 1 of a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array no connections can be made with the other three ports of that channel If channel 0 port FCO is connected to a fabric switch for example the second
28. view and edit logical Volumes v Chl Mode PID SID DefS ynC1lk Def Wid S Tern CurSynC1k CurWid EC NA Serial F NA Note The Mode column for at least one channel must include the RCC abbreviation for Redundant Controller Communications In the Chl column for channel 2 lt 3 C gt indicates that channel 3 is a redundant loop for channel 2 Similarly in the Chl column for channel 3 lt 2 C gt indicates that channel 2 is a redundant loop for channel 3 2 Select the channel that you want to modify and press Return 6 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 3 Choose channel Mode A menu of channel mode options is displayed Chl Mode PID SID DefS ynClk Def Wid S Term CurS ynC1k CurWid 5 Host 40 NA AUTO Serial F NA F NA 2 view and edit scsi Id 1 F NA 2 GHz Serial view chip inFormation 3 view channel host id Wun 1 F NA 2 GHz Serial View device port name List wwpn gt Data 4 Select a channel mode from the displayed list A confirmation message is displayed 5 Choose Yes to confirm A confirmation message is displayed NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 6 Choose Yes to reset the controller Refer to the Sun StorE
29. you are disconnected from the RAID array Use the telnet command to login to the array again To connect the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program on a host server to a RAID array that has an IP address refer to the out of band management instructions in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide The same document s Email and SNMP appendix provides information about configuring Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software to use Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps and Management Information Bases MIBs to provide information to other out of band enterprise management software The Monitoring the Array chapter explains the use of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service agents to redirect event messages into host system logs Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 21 4 10 Cabling to Expansion Units Caution When connecting expansion units to a RAID array always connect channel 2 of the RAID array to the A channel of the expansion units and connect channel 3 of the RAID array to the B channel of the expansion units Otherwise unexpected behavior might occur Several cabling configurations are possible each with its own advantages and disadvantages Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for your array for more information about the suitability of various configurations for various application requirements as well as for information about high ca
30. 1M Creating an HP UX File System The following command creates a file system on the logical volume created in the previous steps sbin newfs F vxfs dev vgmynewvg rlvol1 J 10 Mounting the File System Manually The process of incorporating a file system into the existing directory structure is known as mounting the file system The files although present on the disk are not accessible to users until they are mounted J 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1 Create a directory to be the mount point for your new file system mkdir usr local myfs 2 To mount your file system type the following mount dev vgmynewvg lvol1l usr local myfs J 11 Mounting the File System Automatically By placing information about your file system in the fstab file you can have HP UX mount the file system automatically during bootup You can also use the name of the mount point in mount commands that you issue from the console 1 Make a copy of the existing fstab file cp etc fstab etc fstab orig 2 To include the file system created in the example add the following line to the file etc fstab dev vg0mynewvg lvol1 usr local myfs vxfs delaylog 0 2 See the entry for fstab 4 for details about creating etc fstab entries 3 To check to see if fstab was set up correctly type mount a If the mount point and the
31. 3510 FC JBOD arrays However since Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays do not have a RAID controller to manage the disks this software support is necessarily limited Monitoring functionality that does not require a RAID controller works the same way it does for RAID arrays See Using Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Monitoring and Management Tools with JBOD Arrays on page B 4 for more specific information m Similarly Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter support for standalone JBOD arrays is limited to functionality that can work without a RAID controller m The Sun StorEdge CLI supports Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays However because Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays do not have a RAID controller to manage the disks this CLI support is limited Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 3 Refer to the Monitoring JBODs appendix in the Sun StorEdge 3000 family CLI User s Guide for more information about using these commands B 5 B 5 1 Using Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Monitoring and Management Tools with JBOD Arrays The following software management tools are provided on the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Professional Storage Manager CD provided with your array The documentation CD provides the related user guides m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Provides centralized storage configuration maintenance and monitoring functions Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configura
32. 3511 FC array NRAID does not provide data redundancy and is not recommended RAID 0 Striping without data redundancy provides maximum performance RAID 1 Mirrored or duplexed disks For each disk in the system a duplicate disk is maintained for data redundancy RAID 1 requires 50 of total disk capacity for overhead RAID 3 Striping with dedicated parity One drive is dedicated to parity Data is divided into blocks and striped across the remaining drives Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 15 6 1 9 TABLE 6 6 RAID Level Definitions RAID Level Description RAID 5 Striping with distributed parity This is the best suited RAID level for multitasking or transaction processing The data and parity are striped across each drive in the logical drive so that each drive contains a combination of data and parity blocks RAID 1 0 RAID 1 0 combines RAID 1 and RAID 0 mirroring and disk striping RAID 1 0 allows multiple drive failures because of the full redundancy of the hard disk drives If four or more hard disk drives are chosen for a RAID 1 logical drive RAID 1 0 is performed automatically RAID 3 0 A logical volume with several RAID 3 member logical drives RAID 5 0 A logical volume with several RAID 5 member logical drives Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more informa
33. 5 Converting a JBOD toa RAID Array 3 6 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 1 4 1 Converting Your Front Bezel Locks So the Keys Cannot Be Removed 4 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 Fibre Channel Array Connections 4 4 4 2 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 4 5 4 2 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 6 Connecting the Chassis to AC Power Outlets 4 7 Connecting the Chassis to DC Power Outlets 4 8 Powering Up and Checking LEDs 4 10 Reviewing Channels Ports and SFPs 4 11 4 6 1 Drive Port Connectivity in a Dual Controller Array 4 12 4 6 1 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Arrays 4 12 4 6 1 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 13 4 6 2 Host Port Connectivity in a Dual Controller Array 4 13 4 6 2 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 4 14 4 6 2 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 14 4 6 3 Default SFP Placement 4 15 4 64 Changing Your SFP Configuration 4 18 Configuring a COM Port to Connect toa RAID Array 4 19 Setting an IP Address 4 19 Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet 4 20 Cabling to Expansion Units 4 22 4 10 1 Scaling a Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array Into a High Capacity Configuration 4 25 Setting Loop IDs on Expansion Units 4 26 Connecting Ports to Hosts 4 28 Power On Sequence 4 29 Power Off Procedure 4 30 Configuration Overview 5 1 5 1 Controller Defaults and Limitations 5 2 5 1 1 Planning for Reliabi
34. 5 3 3 7 10 11 12 Map logical drive 0 to channels 0 and 1 of the primary controller Map LUN numters 0 through 31 to the single ID on each host channel Map logical drive 1 to channels 4 and 5 of the secondary controller Map LUN numbers 0 through 31 to the single ID on each host channel Since each set of LUNs is assigned to two channels for redundancy the total working maximum number of LUNs is 64 LUNs Note The LUN ID numbers and the number of LUNs available per logical drive can vary according to the number of logical drives and the ID assignments you want on each channel Connect the first switch to ports 0 and 4 of the upper controller Connect the second switch to ports 1 and 5 of the lower controller Connect each server to each switch Install and enable multipathing software on each connected server The multipathing software prevents path failure but does not alter the controller redundancy through which one controller automatically takes over all functions of a second failed controller A DAS Loop Configuration Example The typical direct attached storage DAS configuration shown in FIGURE 5 3 and FIGURE 5 4 includes four servers a dual controller array and two expansion units Expansion units are optional Servers as shown in FIGURE 5 3 and FIGURE 5 4 are connected to the following channels TABLE 5 2 Connection for Four Servers in a DAS Configuration Server Number Upper I O
35. Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 5 B22 In Band Connection With in band host connections you can use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software or the command line interface CLI Refer to the m Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for the in band setup procedures m Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide m Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide This manual provides installation instructions for all host based software oh A Summary of Array Configuration Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays are preconfigured as follows a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array One or two RAID 5 logical drives with one or two global spare drives The array can be used as is or reconfigured m Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array One or two NRAID logical drives with no global spares The array must be reconfigured All configuration procedures can be performed by using the COM port You can perform all procedures except the assignment of an IP address through an Ethernet port connection to a management console The typical sequence of steps for completing a first time configuration of the array is to Mount the array on a rack cabinet desk or table Set up the serial port connection See Configuring a COM Port to Connect to a RAID Array on page 4 19 Set up an IP address for the controller See Setting an IP Address on page 4 19 Check available physical drives See Check
36. Checking LEDs on page 7 1 for more information about your array s LEDs 4 6 Reviewing Channels Ports and SFPs I O controller modules have ports that accept SFP transceivers These ports are labeled FCO through FC5 to indicate channels 0 through 5 Default configurations do not include an SFP connector in every SFP port To add or change SFP connectors refer to Changing Your SFP Configuration on page 4 18 The channels and associated ports for the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays are summarized in TABLE 4 3 TABLE 4 3 Number of Ports in the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Arrays Item Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Total number of 6 8 ports Channel 0 1 FCO host or drive port 2 FCO dedicated host ports default host port Channel 1 1 FC1 host or drive port 2 FC1 dedicated host ports default host port Channel 2 1 1 FC2 dedicated drive port 1 FC2 dedicated drive port Channel 3 2 1 FC3 dedicated drive port 1 FC3 dedicated drive port Channel 4 1 FC4 host or drive port 1 FC4 host or drive port default host port default host port Channel 5 1 FC5 host or drive port 1 FC5 host or drive port default host port default host port Only one host port connection per channel is allowed when connecting to a fabric switch 1 Channel 2 drive ports connect to drive loop A ports on expansion units 2 Channel 3 drive ports connect to drive loop B ports on expansion units Chapt
37. Flowchart 2 of 2 9 16 FC Drive LEDs Flowchart 1 of 2 9 18 FC Drive LEDs Flowchart 2 of 2 9 19 Front Panel LEDs FC Flowchart 1 of 4 9 20 Front Panel LEDs Flowchart 2 of 4 9 21 Front Panel LEDs Flowchart 3 of 4 9 22 Front Panel LEDs FLowchart 4 of 4 9 23 I O Controller Module Flowchart 9 25 ID Switch B 6 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Attached to a Single HBA Port B 8 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Attached to Two HBA Ports B 9 JBOD or Expansion Unit Troubleshooting Flowchart 1 of 2 B 17 JBOD or Expansion Unit Troubleshooting Flowchart 2 of 2 B 18 Ethernet RJ 45 Socket 10 100 BASE T E 1 RS 232 DB9 EIA TIA 574 View of the Male End E 2 RAID Array COM Port Connected Locally to the Serial Port of a Workstation F 2 Worldwide Name Information Displayed by the luxadm command F 5 RAID Array COM Port Connected Locally to the Serial Port of a Host System l 3 Network Address Corresponding to WWN I 10 RAID Array COM Port Connected Locally to the Serial Port of a Host System J 3 Figures XV xvi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 Tables TABLE 1 1 TABLE 1 2 TABLE 2 1 TABLE 2 2 TABLE 2 3 TABLE 2 4 TABLE 2 5 TABLE 3 1 TABLE 3 2 TABLE 4 1 TABLE 4 2 TABLE 4 3 TABLE 4 4 TABLE 4 5 TABLE 4 6 TABLE 5 1 TABLE 5 2 TABLE 5 3 TABLE 6 1 Comparison of Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Features 1 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Arra
38. For example if switch 0 fails switch 1 automatically accesses logical drive 0 through the cabling to the lower port on PID 41 m One I O controller module fails and all the host IDs for that controller are reassigned moved to the second 1 O controller module For example if the upper I O controller module is removed host IDs 40 and 41 are automatically moved to the lower module and are managed by the second controller a An I O controller module fails or one cable is removed from an I O controller module and all I O traffic to the disconnected channel is rerouted through the second port host LUN assigned to the logical drive For example if you remove the cable to channel 4 the data path for logical drive 1 switches to the port on channel 5 5 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Server 0 PID 40 0 PID 43 N A 4 N A N A 0 N A SID 45 4 SID 46 Map LGO to PIDs 40 and 43 FIGURE 5 1 Map LG1 to SIDs 45 and 46 N N A Host port on channel number N PID 40 PID43 SID 45 SID46 Host IDs on primary controller Host IDs on secondary controller Not applicable no ID on that controller Port bypass circuit A Point to Point Configuration with a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Switches Cha
39. I 4 a Using SMIT to Enable an AIX Host to Recognize New LUNs on page I 5 m Creating a Volume Group on page I 6 m Creating a Logical Volume on page I 7 m Creating a File System on page I 7 Mounting the New File System on page I 8 Verifying That the New File System Is Mounted on page 1 9 m Determining the World Wide Name for IBM Servers Running AIX on page 1 9 I 1 l 2 Setting Up a Serial Port Connection The RAID controller can be configured by means of a host system running a VT100 terminal emulation program or by a Microsoft Windows terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal If you are planning to access your array over an IP network or through a terminal server and only want to connect through a serial port for the initial configuration of the array it is not necessary to configure a serial port connection from your IBM host For convenience installers frequently perform the initial array configuration using a serial port on a portable computer If you want to use a Microsoft Windows portable computer for this initial array configuration see Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page G 2 for Windows 2000 systems or Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page K 2 for Windows NT systems If you prefer to connect through a serial port on your IBM server consult the hardware information for your IBM host system to locate a serial port you can use for configuri
40. Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 With the Ethernet connection you can configure and monitor RAID arrays and expansion units remotely by using the telnet command to access the firmware application on the array and by using the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service or CLI software Caution If you assign an IP address to an array to manage it out of band for security reasons make sure that the IP address is on a private network rather than a publicly routable network To access the RAID array over an Ethernet connection first set the IP address of the RAID array by using the RAID array s COM port and the RAID firmware See Setting an IP Address on page 4 19 for more information Connect the RAID array s Ethernet port on each controller to the network Note In a dual controller RAID array be sure to connect both Ethernet ports to the network which provides failover if one controller fails To use the firmware application program from the host server connect to the IP address of the RAID array controller with the following command telnet IP address Use the Solaris operating system tip command or a terminal emulation program to access the firmware application program See Using the tip Command for Local Access to the Array on page F 4 for more information Press Ctrl L to refresh the screen and view the Main Menu Note If you reset the controller during a telnet session
41. Logical Drives If you are configuring a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array the NRAID logical drives in your array must be reconfigured to meet your network needs see Reviewing Default Logical Drives and RAID Levels on page 6 14 Note The NRAID configuration is a non RAID logical drive configuration which does not provide data redundancy and is not recommended for standard configurations The RAID array is already configured with one or two logical drives see Reviewing Default Logical Drives and RAID Levels on page 6 14 Each logical drive consists of a single partition by default Use the procedures described in this section to modify the RAID level or to add more logical drives In this procedure you configure a logical drive to contain one or more hard drives based on the desired RAID level and partition the logical drive into additional partitions Be sure to allow enough time when you create logical drives Creating a 2 Terabyte RAID 5 logical drive can take up to m Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 2 25 hours m Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 10 3 hours Note When creating logical drives use only Fibre Channel drives Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array drives or SATA drives Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array drives Logical drives comprised of both Fibre Channel drives and SATA drives are not supported Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 21 Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun
42. Menu Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 19 7 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs Ere o 34476 GOOD i eto a a a aE a a a eel a 9 Choose Delete logical drive ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status LN SB FL P ECA8D8B NA RAIDL 2080 GooD 2 1 i 636BB38 NA RAI D1 GOOD S _ 2 1 ol View scsi drives elete logical drive Partition logical drive logical drive Name logical drive Assignments Expand logical drive 6 ta A warning notice is displayed asking if you are certain you want to delete the logical drive and its data 6 20 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 1 12 10 Choose Yes to confirm ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status O LN SB FL NAME PA 28E4A83F NA RAIDL 34476 GOOD S 2 1 1 i This operation will result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the logical Drive View scsi drives pe logical drive Delete Logical Drive ETEN No NOE I Creating
43. Mounting the File System Manually on page H 8 Mounting the File System Automatically on page H 8 Determining the World Wide Name for Linux Hosts on page H 9 H 1 Setting Up the Serial Port Connection The RAID controller can be configured by means of a host system running a VT100 terminal emulation program or running a terminal emulation program such as Minicom H 1 Note You can also monitor and configure a RAID array over an IP network with the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program after you assign an IP address to the array For details see Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 and refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide To access the controller firmware through the serial port perform the following steps 1 Use a null modem cable to communicate via the serial port of the array Connect the serial null modem cable to the array and to ttyS0 Com1 ttyS1 Com2 ttyS2 Com3 or ttyS3 Com4 Note A DB9 to DB25 serial cable adapter is included in your package contents to connect the serial cable to a DB25 serial port on your host if you do not have a DB9 serial port 2 Power on the array 3 After the array is powered up power on the Linux server and log in as root or log in as su if you logged in as a user 4 Open a terminal session and type minicom s Press Return The setup menu is displayed where y
44. RAID level a Use the up and down arrow keys and press Return to select more drives Chl SizeCMB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID ELED S 34732 2B MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336 753FSUN36G XE Hd 34732 2GGMB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336 753FSUN36G Se ee E E ee PEDI EEJ 34732 2Q6MB _ NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G aca 9 34732 200nB NONE FRNT DRU SEAGATE S T336753FSUN36G 2 3 gt 18 34732 200MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 6 24 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 b After all physical drives have been selected for the logical drive press the Escape key A list of selections is displayed aximum Drive Capacity 34476MB Assign Spare Drives Disk Reserved Space 256 MB Logical Drive Assignments 6 Optional Set the maximum physical drive capacity a Optional Choose Maximum Drive Capacity Note Changing the maximum drive capacity reduces the size of the logical drive and leaves some disk space unused b Optional Type a capacity for the logical drive you are creating and press Return LG ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status O LN SB FL NAME 34476MB Maximum Available Drive Gapac it y MB gt 34476 Maximum Drive Capacit y MB gt 20000 A logical drive should be composed of physical drives with the same capacity A logical drive ca
45. Rate for the tip Command on page F 3 Using the tip Command for Local Access to the Array on page F 4 Determining the WWN in the Solaris Operating Environment on page F 4 Fl Setting Up the Serial Port Connection The RAID controller can be configured by means of a Solaris workstation running a VT100 terminal emulation program or by a Microsoft Windows terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal Note You can also monitor and configure a RAID array over an IP network with the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program once you have assigned an IP address to the array For details see Configuring a COM Port to Connect to a RAID Array on page 4 19 and refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide 1 Use a null modem serial cable to connect the COM port of the RAID array to an unused serial port on a Solaris workstation A DB9 to DB25 serial cable adapter is included in your package contents to connect the serial cable to a DB25 serial port on a workstation FIGURE F 1 RAID Array COM Port Connected Locally to the Serial Port of a Workstation Power up the array It can take two or three minutes for both controllers to be initialized before communication is possible over the connection Set the serial port parameters on the workstation See Configuring a COM Port to Connect to a RAID Array on page 4 19 for the parameters to us
46. Sun Enterprise 220R server Yes Sun Enterprise 250 server Yes Sun Enterprise 420R server Yes Sun Enterprise 450 server Yes B 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE B 1 Supported Sun Servers and Connection Methods JBOD Arrays Continued Server HBA Sun Fire V120 server Yes Sun Fire V280 server Yes Sun Fire V880 server Yes B 4 Known Limitations Affecting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays Limitations affecting the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array are listed below Booting from a JBOD disk is not supported in this release m The mpxio functionality of Sun StorEdge SAN Foundation Suite 4 2 software is not supported with Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays a Only Sun hosts running the Solaris operating system are supported in this release m Sun Cluster software is not supported in this release a VERITAS Cluster Server VCS software is not supported in this release a Only direct attached single host connections to a single JBOD are supported in this release There is no multihost support in this release Fibre Channel switches are not supported in this release Daisy chaining is not supported in this release m Sun Storage Automated Diagnostic Environment StorADE 2 3 software is not supported in this release Do not use the luxadm utility to diagnose or manage Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software supports Sun StorEdge
47. Yes End original slot a gg g Shean cote module LED A g firmware or software amber No Replace chassis End No Check for SFP link status Yes gt proper Replace SFP Replace amber 2 cabling gt with cable known good one s No No Connect Resolved Resolved Resolved to known good HBA Yes Yes Yes No v y End End End Replace I O Resolved No expansion module Notes To check cabling look for bent pins loose wires loose cable shielding or loose cable casing 7 Fibre Channel arrays use SFP connectors to fi attach the array to hosts and expansion units Each Fibre Channel I O expansion module has two SFP ports These ports are labeled Loop A or Loop B End Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array FIGURE B 4 JBOD or Expansion Unit Troubleshooting Flowchart 1 of 2 Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 17 5B JBOD or expansion unit problem FC Has a controller failure occurred Yes gt Replace I O expansion module No Has a data error occurred Yes gt Correct data error No y Switch controller with know good controller Resolved Yes gt Replace chassis End Possible midplane Resolved
48. Your SFP Configuration on JBOD Arrays Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays use SFP connectors to attach to Fibre Channel ports on your host computer You might need to move or add one or more SFP connectors to your Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array to connect it to your host computer To make connections to an empty port first slide the SFP connector into the port so that it connects firmly with the chassis Then plug the fiber optic cable s SFP connector into the duplex jack at the end of the SFP To remove an SFP connector make sure no cable is connected to it and then slide it out from the port For more information about SFPs refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array B 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 B 7 4 Connecting the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array to a Host Computer Use fiber optic cables to connect one or two HBA ports on the host computer to the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array as shown in FIGURE B 2 and FIGURE B 3 Connect a fiber optic cable to an HBA Set your loop IDs using the ID switch on the JBOD array Connect the SFP connector at the other end of each of these fiber optic cables to host channel SFP connectors on the back of the JBOD array Power up the equipment in the following order so that the host computer discovers all connected arrays a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array b Host c
49. a Linux Server H 9 H 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 APPENDIX Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment This appendix provides platform specific host installation and configuration information to use when you connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array to an IBM server running the AIX operating environment The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Arrays support versions 4 3 3 and 5 1L of the IBM AIX operating environment in dual path configurations using Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 failover drivers for IBM AIX Refer to the Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 Installation and User s Guide for the IBM AIX Operating System for detailed instructions about setting up the device driver on the server and for additional information about configuring your IBM server Customers interested in Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 for multiplatform support should contact Sun Sales or visit http www sun com sales For more information about multiplatform support see http www sun com storage san multiplatform_support html The information in this appendix supplements the configuration steps presented in Chapter 6 and covers the following steps m Setting Up a Serial Port Connection on page I 2 m Accessing the Firmware Application From an IBM Server Running AIX on page I 3 m Identifying the Device on Which You Will Create a Logical Volume on page
50. ear of the chassis and shown in FIGURE 7 2 Drive Power LED 1 LED 2 Fan LED 3 Temp Event Reset push button FIGURE 7 1 Front Panel LEDs FIGURE 7 2 shows the chassis ear LEDs and reset push button Use a paperclip to push the Reset button to silence a failed component alarm See Silencing Audible Alarms on page 8 4 for more information about silencing audible alarms Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 oooo Fan Temp Event Power Reset push button FIGURE 7 2 Chassis Ear LEDs and Reset Button on Front Panel TABLE 7 2 lists the front panel LEDs and describes LED activity TABLE 7 2 Front Panel LEDs LED LED Color Description Drive Solid green Good Drive power up and spin up OK Blinking green Solid amber Good Indicates drive activity Failed Drive failure Power Light bulb icon Monitors the DC output voltage within tolerance specification Overcurrent protection shutting down any voltage output is also displayed Voltage thresholds 5 VDC 25 VDC 12 VDC 6 VDC Current thresholds 5 VDC 35A 12 VDC 25A Solid green Solid amber Good Power supply good Failed One or more output voltages out of range Fan Fan icon Monitors the fan speed within nominal operational RPM specification of 5000 RPM Solid green Solid amber Good Both fa
51. file and add the following line LABEL mount point mount point ext3 1 2 3 Save the file H 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 To verify that fstab was set up correctly type mount a If the mount point and the fstab file are correctly set up no errors are displayed 5 To verify that the file system is mounted and list all mounted file systems type df k 6 To unmount the file system type umount filesystem name Determining the World Wide Name for Linux Hosts Before you can create host filters you need to know the world wide name WWN for the FC HBA that connects your host to your FC array 1 Boot a specific host system and note the BIOS version and HBA card models connected to your host 2 Access the HBA card s BIOS with the appropriate command Alt Q or Control A are commonly used If the host has multiple HBA cards select the card that is connected to the array 3 Scan the card to look for devices attached to it usually with the Scan Fibre Devices or the Fibre Disk Utility The node name or similar label is the WWN The following example shows the node name for a Qlogic card ID Vendor Product Rev Node Name Port ID 0 Qlogic QLA22xx Adapter B 210000E08B02DE2F 0000EF See Setting Up Host Filter Entries on page 6 42 for more information about creating host filters Appendix H Configuring
52. for IBM Servers Running AIX Before you can create host filters you need to know the world wide name WWN for the FC HBA that connects your host to your FC array For supported IBM HBAs perform these steps 1 Determine the device name by typing the command lscfg grep fc 2 Type the following command 1lscfg vl device name Appendix Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment l 9 Output similar to the following is displayed The network address is the WWN Iscfg ou txt Notepad ioi x File Edit Search Help LOCATION DESCRIPTION fcs1 FC Adapter Serial FRU GOP 4495 Network Address 1666666600932A 752 ROS Level Device Specific 26 Device Device Specific 22 66666666 Device 62666969 Device Specific 24 FF461650 Device 62C 63891 Device Specific 26 66433891 Device 07433891 Device Specific 28 26666666C0932A752 Device CS3 82A1 Device Specific 2A C1D3 82A1 Device C2D3 82A1 Device Specific L P1 11 Q1 FIGURE I 2 Network Address Corresponding to WWN l 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment This appendix provides platform specific host installation and configuration information to use when you connect a Sun StorEdge 3500 or 3511 FC Array to an HP server running the HP UX operating environment For a list of support
53. for your array to see instructions for downloading firmware for devices Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide or the sccli 1M man page for similar instructions using the CLI Refer to the release notes for your array for instructions about where to obtain the firmware that you need to download When you open Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software or the CLI and connect to the array an error message alerts you to the mismatched version problem 8 7 8 7 1 Replacing the Front Bezel and Ear Caps Some procedures require that you remove the front bezel and the small vertical plastic caps on either side of the bezel that cover the rackmount tabs These rackmount tabs are referred to as ears Removing the Front Bezel and Ear Caps Use the provided key to unlock both bezel locks Grasp the front bezel cover on both sides and pull it forward and then down Note For many operations including replacing disk drives it is not necessary to further detach the bezel because dropping it down moves it sufficiently out of the way Press the right bezel arm hinge toward the left side to release it from the chassis hole The left hinge also disengages 8 26 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 7 2 Note the location of the chassis bezel holes on each ear Remove the plastic caps from the front left and right ears of the array Both plas
54. from the Volume Groups menu Type the name you want to give the volume group next to VOLUME GROUP name Next to PHYSICAL VOLUME name type the name of the disk device you identified in Identifying the Device on Which You Will Create a Logical Volume on page I 4 An ARE YOU SURE confirmation screen is displayed Confirm this message to display a status screen When the volume group is created a status screen displays Command OK Return to the Volume Groups screen to activate the new volume group Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 7 Choose Activate a Volume Group from the Volume Groups menu 8 Next to VOLUME GROUP name type the name you gave the volume group When the volume group is activated a status screen displays Command OK I 6 Creating a Logical Volume 1 Return to the Logical Volume Manager screen 2 Choose Logical Volumes from the Logical Volume Manager menu to display the Logical Volumes screen 3 Choose Add a Logical Volume from the Logical Volumes menu to display the Add a Logical Volume screen 4 Type the name you gave the volume group next to VOLUME GROUP name The Add a Logical Volume screen is displayed 5 Type the name you want to give the new logical volume next to LOGICAL VOLUME new 6 Type the number of partitions you want to create on the new logical volume next to Number of LOGICAL PARTITIONS 7 T
55. fstab file are correctly set up no errors are displayed 4 To verify that the file system is mounted and list all mounted file systems type bdf Appendix J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment J 11 5 To unmount the file system type umount usr local myfs J 12 Determining the World Wide Name for HP UX Hosts Before you can create host filters you need to know the world wide name WWN for the FC HBA that connects your host to your FC array For supported HP UX host HBAs follow these steps 1 Determine the device name by typing the command ioscan fnC fc 2 Type omsutil device name Output similar to the following is displayed DB wwn Notepad File Edit Format view Help vendor ID is 0x00103c Device ID is 0x001029 XL2 Chip Revision No is 2 3 PCI Sub system Vendor ID is PCI sub system ID is Topology Link Speed Local N_Port_id is Local Leap_id 4 N_Port Node world wide Name N Pott Port world wide Name Driver state Hardware Path is Number of Assisted Ios Number of Active Login Sessions Dino Present on Card Maximum Frame size Driver Version 0x00103c 0x00128c PRIVATE_LOOP 2Gb 0x000001 425 0x50060b00001e78af ONLINE 0747070 10967 1 NO 960 C PATCH_11 11 libtd a Jun 28 2002 11 08 35 PHSS_26799 The Node World Wide Name shown is the WWN you use when configuring the RAID controller J 12 S
56. gt I Lower Threshold for 3 3U Event Default 2 9U gt U Voltage and Temperature Parameters 4 To edit a threshold level or other editable value backspace over the existing information and type the new value 8 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 4 5 Viewing SES Status The array s SCSI Enclosure Services SES processor located on the controller I O module monitors environmental conditions and is supported by Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and the command line interface For Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays only both Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and the CLI access the SES processor using device files in dev es such as dev es ses0 as shown in the following example sccli Available devices 1 dev rdsk c4t0d0s2 SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 000280 Primary 2 dev es sesO SUN StorEdge 3510F D SN 00227B Enclosure To check the status of SES components temperature sensors cooling fans the beeper speaker power supplies and slot status perform the following steps Choose view and edit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status SES Device A list is displayed of environmental sensors and other hardware components for the SES device lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view an view an view an view an view an Enclosure Descriptor Help Text Cooling element
57. include the title and part number of your document with your feedback Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual part number 816 7300 16 xxiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER 1 Product and Architecture Overview This Installation Operation and Service Manual describes both the Sun Storage 3510 FC Array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array with SATA The Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array with SATA is also known as the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array which is the term used throughout the documentation The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays are rack mountable Network Equipment Building System NEBS Level 3 compliant Fibre Channel mass storage subsystems NEBS Level 3 is the highest level of NEBS criteria used to assure maximum operability of networking equipment in mission critical environments such as telecommunications central offices Sun StorEdge 3510 Array The Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array is designed for high availability high performance and high capacity Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array The Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array is designed for high availability and employs Serial ATA SATA technology for high density storage with a Fibre Channel front end This provides high capacity with a small footprint making this array ideal for content management archiving applications This chapter provides a brief overview of the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays
58. light on a connected port s Ethernet link LED indicates that this controller is not the active controller Note An SFP link status L LED is off if there is no connection or a failed connection to this SFP Note To test that the LEDs work using a paperclip press and hold the Reset button for 5 seconds All the LEDs should change from green to amber when you perform this test Any LED that fails to light indicates a problem with the LED When you release the Reset button the LEDs return to their initial state Chapter 7 Checking LEDs 7 7 Ti Power Supply and Fan Module LEDs TABLE 7 4 Power Supply LEDs Purpose LED LED Color Definition Monitors the DC output voltage within Solid green tolerance specification Overcurrent protection shutting down any voltage output is also displayed Voltage thresholds 5 VDC 25 VDC 12 VDC 6 VDC Current thresholds 5 VDC 35A 12 VDC 25A Solid amber Power supply and fans are good Failed One or more output voltages out of range or one or both fans is rotating at less than 4000 RPM The following figure shows the AC power supply and fan module LED FIGURE 7 7 AC Power Supply and Fan Module The following figure shows the DC power supply and fan module LED FIGURE 7 8 DC Power Supply and Fan Module 7 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER 8 Maintai
59. locks are used to securely fasten the AC cable connectors Caution If the array is connected to AC power sources not within the designated 90 135 180 264 VAC range the unit might be damaged Note To ensure power redundancy be sure to connect the two power supply modules to two separate circuits for example one commercial circuit and one UPS To connect the AC power cords perform the following procedure Use a screwdriver to remove the screw and cylindrical standoff from one of the two provided cord locks Set them aside for reassembly later Slide the cord lock over the AC power connector Hold the cylindrical standoff between the two screw holes on the flanges of the cord lock Insert the screw into the first screw hole through the standoff and then into the threaded screw hole on the other flange Tighten the screw with a screwdriver until the flanges bottom out on the cylindrical standoff Push the power cord into the power supply receptacle until it is firmly seated Push the green ejector handle forward until it is seated against the power supply Turn the thumbscrew of the green ejector handle clockwise until it is finger tight to secure the handle and the cord lock Repeat Step 1 through Step 8 for the second cord lock and second power cable Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 7 FIGURE 4 5 Installing a Cord Lock 4 4 Connecting the Chassis
60. mode is selected and data written to logical drives the only way to change the optimization mode is to back up all data to another location delete all logical drives reconfigure the array with the new optimization mode and reboot the array Then you can create new logical drives Note The maximum allowable size of a logical drive optimized for sequential I O is 2 Tbyte The maximum allowable size of a logical drive optimized for random I O is 512 Gbyte When creating a logical drive that exceeds these limits an error message is displayed For more information about optimization modes refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity for Random and Sequential Optimization Your choice of random or sequential optimization affects the maximum number of disks you can include in a logical drive and the maximum usable capacity of a logical drive 6 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 1 7 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array TABLE 6 2 contains the maximum number of disks that the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array can support in a logical drive TABLE 6 3 contains the maximum usable capacity of a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array logical drive Note You can have a maximum of eight logical drives The Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array supports a maximum of 108 logical drives one array and eight expansion units T
61. parameters to use Note The next section also shows how to use the Kermit utility to set these parameters Once you have configured your serial port follow the instructions in the next section Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 J 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From an HP Server Running HP UX The RAID controller can be configured from the host system by means of terminal emulators such as cu or Kermit These instructions show the use of Kermit For information about cu see cu 1 Note You can also monitor and configure a RAID array over an IP network with the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program after you assign an IP address to the array For details see Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 and refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide To access the controller firmware through the serial port perform the following steps 1 Use a null modem serial cable to connect the COM port of the RAID array to an unused serial port on your host system A null modem cable has serial signals swapped for connecting to a standard serial interface Note A DB9 to DB25 serial cable adapter is included in your package contents to connect the serial cable to a DB25 serial port on your host if you do not have a DB9 serial port FIGURE J 1 RAID Array COM Port
62. physical storage in a volume group consists of one or more physical volumes A physical volume can be a single physical disk or a partition of a disk array Each physical volume is divided into units called physical extents The default size of these units is 4 MB but can range in size from 1 MB to 256 MB The maximum number of physical extents that a volume group can contain is 65 535 With the default size of 4 MB this limits the size of the volume group to 255 GB To create a volume group larger than 255 GB you must increase the size of the physical extents when creating the volume group See vgcreate 1m for further information Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 J 6 Creating a Physical Volume To use a storage resource in the LVM it must first be initialized into a physical volume also called an LVM disk Log in as root or su to root if you are not logged in with root user privileges 1 Select one or more partitions on the array that you want to use The output of ioscan 1M shows the disks attached to the system and their device names ioscan fnc disk Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description disk 1 0 12 0 0 6 0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE Sun StorEdge 3510 dev dsk cl12t6d2 dev rdsk c12t6d2 2 Initialize each partition as an LVM disk with the pvcreate command For example type pvcreate dev rdsk c12t6d2 Caut
63. port of channel 0 on that controller and the FCO ports on a redundant controller cannot be used Note The connection of a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array to Fibre Channel HBAs that use different speeds 1 Gbit and 2 Gbit on the same channel is not supported You can however mix 1 Gbit and 2 Gbit Fibre Channel HBAs on different channels This limitation is due to the design of Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel array port bypass circuitry and the inability of Fibre Channel to support auto negotiation in a multi drop loop configuration Use fiber optic cables to connect host channels to Fibre Channel HBAs on your host computers or to other devices such as storage switches Connect a fiber optic cable to an HBA or FC port on each host or storage switch you want to connect to the array Connect the SFP connector at the other end of each of these fiber optic cables to host channel SFP connectors on the back of the array If there is no SFP connector in the port you want to use first insert an SFP connector into the port as described in Changing Your SFP Configuration on page 4 18 4 13 Power On Sequence Power on the equipment in the following order so the host computer discovers all connected arrays a Expansion units b RAID array c Host computers When the array is powered on and is connected to a Solaris operating system the Tip connection window displays a series of messages as shown in the following exa
64. rameters emperature Sensors es ne Uo s v Ee Element Descriptor TL v Neral Gestur man D Element STATUS LOCATION A C R Failback Complete Primary F Ec Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID 12 Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 15 8 4 6 2 Select an item from the list and press Return to display information about it or see a submenu of its component attributes Choosing Overall Status displays the status of the SES device and its operating temperature lt Main Menu gt Quick installation l Status T Temperature view an Device rameters STATUS LOCATION Failback Complete Enclosure Device Channel 2 ID 12 Primary Select other attributes in which you are interested and press Return to view additional environmental conditions Note When viewing component attributes press 4 to view additional attributes that are not displayed in the window SES Temperature Sensor Locations Monitoring the temperature at different points within the array is one of the most important SES functions High temperatures can cause significant damage if they go unnoticed There are a number of different sensors at key points within the enclosure The following table shows the location of each of those sensors The Element ID corresponds to the identifier shown when you choose view and edit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status SES Device
65. switch issues an inquiry command to a mapped LUN on the array the switch obtains the company name from the inquiry data of the LUN In this case the switch displays Sun StorEdge 3510 or Sun StorEdge 3511 which is the inquiry data returned by the RAID controller As shown in FIGURE 6 6 when you map LUN 01 to host channel 0 and select WWN1 server A has a proprietary path to that logical drive All servers continue to see and access LUN 02 and LUN 03 unless filters are created on them Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 43 Prior to using the LUN Filter feature identify which array is connected to which HBA card and the WWN assigned to each card This procedure varies according to the HBA you are using Refer to the appendix for your host for instructions on identifying the WWN for your host 6 2 3 1 Creating Host Filter Entries Use the Create Host Filter Entry command when multiple hosts share the same loop can view all the drives and need to be filtered so that a host sees only the logical drives that are exclusive to its use Map Host LUN is used when multiple hosts are not on the same loop To use this option see Using the Map Host LUN Option on page 6 37 Note You can create a maximum of 128 host filters Note If you plan to create hundreds of host filters the process is easier if you use the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program To create host filters perform the following step
66. the File System Manually H 8 Mounting the File System Automatically H 8 Determining the World Wide Name for Linux Hosts H 9 Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment I 1 I 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 Setting Up a Serial Port Connection I 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From an IBM Server Running AIX I 3 Identifying the Device on Which You Will Create a Logical Volume I 4 Using SMIT to Enable an AIX Host to Recognize New LUNs I 5 Creating a Volume Group I 6 Creating a Logical Volume I 7 Creating a File System I 7 Contents xi 1 8 1 9 1 10 Mounting the New File System I 8 Verifying That the New File System Is Mounted I 9 Determining the World Wide Name for IBM Servers Running AIX 9 J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment J 1 J J 2 J 3 J 4 J 5 J 6 J 7 J 8 J 9 J 10 J 11 J 12 Setting Up a Serial Port Connection J 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From an HP Server Running HP UX J 3 Attaching the Disk Array J 5 Logical Volume Manager J 6 Definitions of Common Terms J 6 Creating a Physical Volume J 7 Creating a Volume Group J 7 Creating a Logical Volume J 10 Creating an HP UX File System J 10 Mounting the File System Manually J 10 Mounting the File System Automatically J 11 Determining the World Wide Name for HP UX Hosts J 12 K Configuring a Windows NT Server K 1 K 1 K 2 K 3 K 4 Setting Up the Serial Port Connecti
67. the key in place Otherwise there is a risk of breaking the small tab on the lock that serves as a stop 4 Lift the pawl off the threaded part of the lock body as shown in the second panel of FIGURE 4 2 FIGURE 4 2 Sequence of Steps to Change Front Bezel Locks So Keys Cannot Be Removed 5 Set the pawl aside face up so that you can remember its orientation when you replace it 6 Use the key to turn the lock 180 degrees as shown in the third panel of FIGURE 4 2 Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 3 7 Replace the pawl in the same orientation as before as shown in the fourth panel of FIGURE 4 2 8 Hold the key in place and use the nut driver to refasten the locking nut that holds the pawl in place as shown in the fifth panel of FIGURE 4 2 Be careful not to cross thread the nut Caution Be sure to hold the key in place Otherwise there is a risk of breaking the small tab on the lock that serves as a stop 9 Replace the bezel Note To convert your bezel locks so that the keys can be removed repeat this procedure 4 2 Fibre Channel Array Connections Management is in band through fibre host connections and out of band through the serial port and Ethernet port on the back of each controller 4 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 2 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array FIGURE 4 3 identifies the hardware connections on th
68. to DC Power Outlets Note The Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array can only be ordered in an AC configuration However DC power supplies can be ordered in an x option kit and a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array can be reconfigured using the DC power supplies Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide for a procedure for removing and replacing power supplies Two DC power cords are packaged with each DC array To connect the DC power cords perform the following procedure 4 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1 Check the DC cable part number and wire labels carefully before connecting the cable to the source TABLE 4 1 DC Cable Wiring for Cable 35 00000148 Pin Number Voltage Color A3 Return Red A2 GND Chassis Ground Green Yellow Al 48vdc Black TABLE 4 2 DC Cable Wiring for Cable 35 00000156 Pin Number Voltage Color A3 L Red A2 GND Chassis Ground Green Yellow A1 L White 2 Connect a DC power cable to the first power supply and to a power outlet Note Use only the DC power cables provided with the array Caution If the array is connected to DC power sources not within the designated 48V DC 36 VDC to 72 VDC range the unit might be damaged Note To ensure power redundancy be sure to connect the two power supply modules to two separate circuits for example one commercial circuit and one UPS Note To extend
69. to use and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns CHL ID 40 Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List Fortivion Sieecr gt mai Map Host LUN Create Host Filter Entr ecucecce 542 FFFFFFF Name mars H F A Name Not Set Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 49 11 Verify all settings and press Esc to continue lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns CHL ID 40 Primary Contro CHL ID 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List ion ian pmo Pareiion Size mar a LD al of s 1 Map Host LUN Create Host Filter Entr Logical Drive Partition Host IDAWWN 6x6 6666966006323542 Host IDAWWN Mask xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Filter Type Exclude Access Mode Read Write Name mars ecucecce Note Unlike most firmware operations where you must complete each entry individually and repeat the procedure if you want to perform a similar operation you can add multiple WWNs to your list before you actually create the host filter entry in Step 13 Be sur
70. 0 and 3511 FC Array Highlights on page A 3 m Agency Approvals and Standards on page A 5 A 1 A 1 A 2 Physical Specifications TABLE A 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Physical Specifications Description Desktop Rackmount Height 3 64 in 9 25 cm 2U 3 45 in 8 76 cm Width 19 in 48 26 cm 17 56 in 44 60 cm body Depth Main chassis 18 in 45 72 cm Main chassis 18 in 45 72 cm Weight fully loaded RAID array Weight fully loaded expansion unit To back of power supply 20 in 50 8 cm To back of power supply handle 21 in 53 34 cm 69 3 Ib 31 4 kg with 73 GB drives 65 6 Ib 29 8 kg with 250 GB drives 62 9 lb 28 6 kg with 73 GB drives 62 6 Ib 28 5 kg with 250 GB drives To back of power supply 20 in 50 8 cm To back of power supply handle 21 in 53 34 cm 63 3 Ib 28 7 kg with 73 GB drives 59 1 lb 26 9 kg with 250 GB drives 56 9 Ib 25 8 kg with 73 GB drives 56 1 lb 25 5 kg with 300 GB drives Note Add 10 6 lb 4 8 kg for packaging if you want to know the shipping weight of an array or expansion unit Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 A 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Highlights Feature Description General Density Reliability RAID System Storage Resource Management e Up to 12 hot pluggable drives in a 2U 3 45 in 8 76 cm high chassis
71. 3 Open the Disk Management folder a Right click on the My Computer icon to display a pop up menu b Choose Manage c Select the Disk Management folder d If a Write Signature and Upgrade Disk Wizard is displayed click Cancel A Connecting to Logical Disk Manager Server status message is displayed 4 Select your new device when it is displayed Action View Samele Tree Partition Basic NTFS Healthy System 8 46 GB Computer Management Local i System Tools g Event Viewer system Information amp 4j Performance Logs and Alerts Shared Folders Device Manager W Ej Local Users and Groups S Storage 3 Disk Management IBF Disk Defragmenter Logical Drives fa Damavahla Sharana x BB Unallocated fE Primary Partition amp SDisk 0 Basic C 8 46 GB 8 46 GB NTFS Online Healthy System 28Disk 2 Basic 3 90 GB Online 5 Right click in the Unallocated partition of your device to display a pop up menu G 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 6 Choose Create Partition from the pop up menu The Create Partition wizard is displayed Create Partition Wizard Select Partition Type You can specify what type of partition to create ol 9 ligaical give 7 Click Next 8 Select Primary partition and click Next Appendix G Configuring a Win
72. 30 voltage and temperature 8 13 create logical drive 6 23 customer obligations 2 2 customer provided cables 3 5 D default configuration Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 6 15 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 6 15 default host channel IDs 6 8 Deleting Logical Drives 6 19 DHCP 4 20 disks not visible 9 2 drive description 1 6 identifying a failed 9 8 drive channels 4 11 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 4 12 sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 4 13 drive failure recovering from a fatal 9 11 drive ports Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 4 12 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 4 13 DRV FAILED status 8 7 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 4 19 E electrical specifications 2 4 electromagnetic compatibility EMC 2 3 environmental range 2 3 Environmental Requirements 2 3 Ethernet connection 4 20 4 21 event LED 7 3 7 4 Event Logs 8 18 expansion unit setting loop ID 4 26 B 6 expansion units cabling to B 8 F failed drive identifying 9 8 failover controller 9 2 fan LED 7 3 fatal drive failure recovering from 9 11 FC Protocols 1 9 FC Topologies 1 9 feature comparison 1 2 Fibre Channel loop architecture 1 11 protocols 1 9 technology overview 1 9 topologies 1 9 fibre channel array configuration options 1 3 feature comparison 1 2 Index 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 identification on chassis 1 4 scaling 4 25 Field Replaceable Units 1 5 field replacea
73. 3510 and 3511 FC Array Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays can be used in the following configurations m Single controller configuration A RAID array can be configured with a single controller in a non redundant configuration a A RAID array with two controllers A RAID array can be configured with two controllers to provide full redundancy m An expansion unit An expansion unit consists of a chassis with disk drives and I O expansion modules The expansion unit does not include an I O controller module The expansion unit connects to and is managed by a RAID array a A Just a Bunch of Disks JBOD array The JBOD array connects to and is managed by a host server Only the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD is supported See Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only on page B 1 for detailed information about using Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays TABLE 1 2 shows the configuration options for Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays Chapter 1 Product and Architecture Overview 1 3 1 4 TABLE 1 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Configuration Options Internal RAID controllers Up to 2 with a minimum of 1 2 Gbit sec Fibre Channel disks Up to 12 per array or per expansion unit with a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array minimum of 4 plus 1 spare 1 5 Gbit sec serial ATA disks Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array FC expansion unitst Up to 8 for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array Up to 5 for a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array
74. 4 16 Default Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array SFP Placement 4 16 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Default Single Controller SFP Placement 4 17 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Default Single Controller SFP Placement 4 17 Sun StorEdge 3510 JBOD Expansion Unit Default SFP Placement 4 17 Sun StorEdge 3511 Expansion Unit Default SFP Placement 4 18 Typical SFP Connector Used to Connect Cables to Chassis SFP Ports 4 18 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Attached to Two Hosts and Two Expansion Units 4 23 xiii FIGURE 4 19 FIGURE 4 20 FIGURE 4 21 FIGURE 5 1 FIGURE 5 2 FIGURE 5 3 FIGURE 5 4 FIGURE 6 1 FIGURE 6 2 FIGURE 6 3 FIGURE 6 4 FIGURE 6 5 FIGURE 6 6 FIGURE 7 1 FIGURE 7 2 FIGURE 7 3 FIGURE 7 4 FIGURE 7 5 FIGURE 7 6 FIGURE 7 7 FIGURE 7 8 FIGURE 8 1 FIGURE 9 1 FIGURE 9 2 FIGURE 9 3 FIGURE 9 4 FIGURE 9 5 FIGURE 9 1 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Attached to Two Hosts and Two Expansion Units 4 24 Front Bezel and Front Bezel Locks of an Array 4 26 ID Switch Located on the Left Front Side of Arrays and Expansion Units 4 27 A Point to Point Configuration with a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Switches 5 13 A Point to Point Configuration With a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array and Two Switches 5 14 A DAS Configuration With Four Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Expansion Units 5 17 A DAS Configuration With Fo
75. 5 spare drives 9 7 specifications clearances 2 5 electrical power 2 4 physical array 2 5 specifications product A 3 speed of drive 8 8 STAND BY drive status 8 9 status windows checking 8 6 switch ID 4 26 B 6 T temp LED 7 3 temperature environmental range 2 3 temperature LED 7 3 tip command F 3 topologies Fibre Channel 1 9 troubleshooting disks not visible 9 2 LUNs not visible 9 2 U Upgrading Firmware 8 22 USED DRV drive status 8 9 vV VERITAS DMP enabling 6 54 Veritas software 6 55 VT100 terminal connection 4 19 WwW worksheet preinstallation 2 7 worldwide name determining on Solaris OE F 4 write back cache 5 5 write through cache 5 5 Index 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004
76. ABLE 6 2 Maximum Number of Disks per Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Logical Drive Disk Capaci RAID 5 RAID 5 Se RAID 3 RAID 3 Se RAID 1 RAID 1 Se RAID 0 RAID 0 Se ty GB Random quential Random quential Random quential Random quential 36 2 14 31 14 31 28 36 14 36 73 4 Z 28 7 28 12 30 6 27 146 8 4 14 4 14 6 26 3 13 TABLE 6 3 Maximum Usable Capacity Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Logical Drive Disk Capacity RAID 5 RAID 5 Se RAID 3 RAID 3 Se RAID 1 RAID 1 Se RAID 0 RAID 0 Se Random quential Random quential Random quential Random quential 36 2 471 1086 471 1086 507 543 507 1122 73 4 440 1982 440 1982 440 1101 440 1982 146 8 440 1908 440 1908 440 1908 440 1908 6 1 7 2 Note In some configurations you might not be able to use all disks for data when using 108 146 Gbyte disks Any remaining disks can be used as spares Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array TABLE 6 4 contains the maximum number of disks per Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array logical drive TABLE 6 5 contains the maximum usable capacity of a logical drive Note You can have a maximum of eight logical drives The Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array supports a maximum of 64 disks for storage with an additional 8 disks for spares for a total of 72 disks one array and five expansion units Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 13 TABLE 6 4 Maximum Number of Disks per Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Logical Drive Disk Capaci RAID 5 RAID 5 Se RAID 3 RAID 3 Se
77. Array 9 7 9 4 Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement If there is a failed drive in a RAID 5 logical drive replace the failed drive with a new drive to keep the logical drive working Caution When trying to remove a failed drive if you mistakenly remove the wrong drive in the same logical drive you will no longer be able to access the logical drive By incorrectly failing a second drive you cause a critical failure of the logical drive Note The following procedure works only if there is no I O activity To find a failed drive identify a single drive or test all drive activity LEDs you can flash the LEDs of any or all drives in an array A defective drive does not flash so this provides a good way to visually identify a failed drive before replacing it 1 In the Main Menu choose view and edit scsi Drives lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs 2 Select any drive and press Return 9 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 9 4 1 3 Choose Identify scsi drive flash All drives This option flashes the activity LEDs of all of the drives in the drive channe
78. B ONLY bave ae ioa O a em l C C ES Default SFP Placement FIGURE 4 16 Sun StorEdge 3511 Expansion Unit Default SFP Placement 4 6 4 Changing Your SFP Configuration Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays use SFP connectors to attach to hosts and expansion units These SFP connectors resemble the one shown in FIGURE 4 17 with a single connector at the end that plugs into an SFP port on the array or expansion unit chassis and a duplex jack into which you insert a cable to make the connection m To make connection to an empty port first slide the SFP connector into the port so that it connects firmly with the chassis Then plug the fiber optic cable s SFP connector into the duplex jack at the end of the SFP m To remove an SFP connector remove the cable if one is connected to it and then slide the SFP out from the port FIGURE 4 17 Typical SFP Connector Used to Connect Cables to Chassis SFP Ports 4 18 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 7 Configuring a COM Port to Connect to a RAID Array The RS 232 COM port on either controller module is used to configure and monitor the RAID array It can be connected to a VT100 terminal or terminal emulation program to a terminal server or to the serial port of a server Use a null modem serial cable to connect the COM port of the RAID array to the serial port on a host works
79. BOD arrays and fibre loops Check your Sun StorEdge Configuration Service console for alerts or messages Check revisions of software package patches and hardware Verify correct device file paths Check any related software configuration or startup files for recent changes Search SunSolve Online for any known related bugs and problems at http sunsolve Sun COM Troubleshooting Hardware Issues When a problem is not otherwise reproducible suspect hardware might need to be replaced Always make only one change at a time and carefully monitor results When possible it is best to restore the original hardware before replacing another part to eliminate the introduction of additional unknown problem sources B 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 After hardware replacement a problem can usually be considered solved if it does not resurface during a period equal to twice its original frequency of occurrence For example if a problem was occurring once a week on average before a potential fix was made running two weeks without seeing the problem again suggests a successful fix took place Troubleshooting hardware problems is usually accomplished by an FRU isolation sequence that uses the process of elimination Set up a minimal configuration that shows the problem and then replace elements in this order testing after each replacement until the problem is solved Replace the ca
80. C Array Logical Drive 6 14 Maximum Usable Capacity Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Logical Drive 6 14 RAID Level Definitions 6 15 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating Environment 6 17 Configuration for 1024 LUNs 6 37 Front Panel LED Status When Array Is First Powered On 7 1 Front Panel LEDs 7 3 I O Controller Module and Battery Module LEDs 7 6 Power Supply LEDs 7 8 Battery Status Indicators 8 3 Silencing the Alarm 8 5 Parameters Displayed in the Logical Drive Status Window 8 7 Parameters Displayed in the Physical Drive Status Window 8 9 Parameters Displayed in the Channel Status Table 8 11 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Temperature Sensor Locations 8 16 Relationship Between Cooling Elements Fans and Power Supply Modules 8 17 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Physical Specifications A 2 Supported Sun Servers and Connection Methods JBOD Arrays B 2 ID Switch Settings for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays B 6 Example of 12 Drives Shown on a 12 Disk Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Connected to a Host Over a Single FC Loop B 8 Example of 24 Drives Shown on a 12 Disk Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Connected to a Host Over Two FC Loops B 10 Failed Component Alarm Codes C 1 Ethernet RJ 45 Pin Description E 1 Pin Names E 2 xviii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Preface gt This manual provides instructions for installing initially configuri
81. CHL ID 40 Primary Contro Mi v CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont Logical Drive u CHL 4 ID 4 lt Primary Contro Partition 0 s CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Channel v Edit Host ID WWN Name List 1D v un Yes A mapped LUN displays a number and a filtered LUN displays an M for masked LUN in the host LUN partition window lt Main Menu gt Quick installation peep peee ee Fis view and edit Logical drives e mar view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns 156666 RAIDS n CHL ID 40 Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List ie St EE ES eee ea ecucece 6 2 4 Creating Device Files for the Solaris Operating Environment 1 To create device files for the newly mapped LUNs on the host in the Solaris 8 operating environment and Solaris 9 operating environment type usr sbin devfsadm v 2 To display the new LUNs type format 3 If the format command does not recognize the newly mapped LUNs reboot the host Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 51 reboot r 6 2 5 Saving Configuration NVRAM to a Disk You can back up your controller dependent configuration information Use this function to save configuration information whenever you change your array s configuration The controller dependent configur
82. Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 8 20 For additional troubleshooting tips refer to the release notes for your array located at 9 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3510 or http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3511 9 6 Using the Reset Push Button The Reset push button servers two purposes a To test that LEDs work To test that the LEDs work use a paperclip to press and hold the Reset button for 5 seconds All the LEDs should change from green to amber when you perform this test Any LED that fails to light indicates a problem with the LED When you release the Reset button the LEDs return to their initial state See Front Panel LEDs on page 7 2 for more information m To silence audible alarms caused by component failures To silence audible alarms that are caused by component failures use a paperclip to push the Reset button See Silencing Audible Alarms on page 8 4 for more information about silencing audible alarms 9 7 Silencing Audible Alarms An audible alarm indicates that either a component in the array has failed or a specific controller event has occurred The cause of the alarm determines how you silence the alarm See Silencing Audible Alarms on page 8 4 for more information ab
83. Configuration Service to download disk drive firmware Controller Firmware Upgrade Features The following firmware upgrade features apply to the controller firmware m Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Upgrade When downloading is performed on a dual controller system firmware is flashed onto both controllers without interrupting host I O When the download process is complete the primary controller resets and lets the secondary controller take over the service temporarily When the primary controller comes back online the secondary controller hands over the workload and then resets itself for the new firmware to take effect The rolling upgrade is automatically performed by controller firmware and the user s intervention is not necessary m Automatically Synchronized Controller Firmware Versions A controller that replaces a failed unit in a dual controller system often has a newer release of the firmware installed than the firmware in the controller it replaced To maintain compatibility the surviving primary controller automatically updates the firmware running on the replacement secondary controller to the firmware version of the primary controller Note When you upgrade your controller firmware in the Solaris operating environment the format 1M command still shows the earlier revision level To correct this you need to update the drive label using the autoconfigure option option 0 of the format 1M command When you sele
84. Configurations 1 3 Field Replaceable Units FRUs 1 5 1 2 1 RAID I O Controller Modules 1 5 1 2 2 I O Expansion Modules 1 6 1 2 3 Disk Drives 1 6 1 2 3 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Disk Drives 1 7 1 2 3 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Disk Drives 1 7 1 2 4 Battery Module 1 7 1 2 5 Power and Fan Modules 1 8 Interoperability 1 8 Fibre Channel Technology Overview 1 9 1 4 1 FC Protocols 1 9 1 4 2 FC Topologies 1 9 1 4 3 Fibre Hubs and Switches 1 10 1 4 4 Data Availability 1 10 1 4 5 Scalability 1 11 Fibre Channel Architecture 1 11 iv 1 6 1 5 1 Redundant Configuration Considerations 1 12 1 5 1 1 Host Bus Adapters 1 12 1 5 1 2 Active to Active Redundant Controller 1 12 1 5 1 3 Host Redundant Paths 1 12 Additional Software Tools 1 13 2 Site Planning 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 Customer Obligations 2 2 Safety Precautions 2 2 Environmental Requirements 2 3 2 3 1 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 2 3 Electrical and Power Specifications 2 4 Physical Specifications 2 5 Layout Map 2 5 2 6 1 Rack Placement 2 5 2 6 2 Tabletop Placement 2 6 Console and Other Requirements 2 7 Preinstallation Worksheet 2 7 3 Unpacking Your FC Array 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 Opening Your Package 3 2 Checking the Package Contents 3 3 3 2 1 Standard Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array Package 3 3 3 2 2 Field Replaceable Units 3 4 Customer Provided Cables 3 5 Mounting Your Array in a Rack or Cabinet 3
85. Connected Locally to the Serial Port of a Host System 2 Power on the array Appendix J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment J 3 3 After the array is powered up power on the HP server and log in as root or su to root if you are logged in as a user 4 Start the Kermit program and set the parameters as shown Use the device specific name for the serial port you are using In the example the serial port being configured is dev tty0pl kermit Executing usr share lib kermit ckermit ini for UNIX Good Morning C Kermit 7 0 197 8 Feb 2000 for HP UX 11 00 Copyright C 1985 2000 Trustees of Columbia University in the City of New York Type or HELP for help C Kermit gt set line dev tty0p1 C Kermit gt set baud 38400 dev tty0pl1 38400 bps C Kermit gt set term byte 8 C Kermit gt set carrier watch off C Kermit gt c Connecting to dev tty0pl1 speed 38400 The escape character is Ctrl ASCII 28 FS Type the escape character followed by C to get back or followed by to see other options J 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Note To return to the Kermit prompt type Ctrl and then C To exit Kermit first return to the Kermit prompt and then type exit Attaching the Disk Array The simplest way to configure a disk array is to use System Administration Manage
86. Controller Module Lower I O Controller Module 1 0 5 2 4 1 3 5 0 4 1 4 5 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 O r eee o eame E c eo Ors es soap i Server connections Expansion units FIGURE 5 3 A DAS Configuration With Four Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Two Expansion Units Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 17 H Server 1 Server 2 sce e Tele ES Zan a eB ONLY Boma Qa me amp ae eae pap oB B 2 GB ONLY fa asi Quem alka me ore Om One Po B _ ___ eae oye te Om md E oe Se ay Say aS 2 GB ONLY ora wore Or k ore CE er Raaey FIGURE 5 4 A DAS Configuration With Four Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array and Two Expansion Units Establishing complete redundancy and maintaining high availability requires the use of multipathing software such as Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software To configure for multipathing 1 Establish two connections between each server and the array 2 Install and enable multipathing software on the server
87. Drive Swap Check Time interval A confirmation message is displayed 3 Choose Yes to confirm When the Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time is enabled that is when a check time interval has been selected the controller detects whether the failed drive has been replaced by checking the failed drive s channel ID Once the failed drive has been replaced the rebuild begins immediately Note This feature requires system resources and can impact performance If the failed drive is not replaced but a local spare is added to the logical drive the rebuild begins with the spare For a flowchart of automatic rebuild see FIGURE 9 1 9 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 One member drive fails in a logical drive Any local spare drive assigned to logical drive Rebuild using the local spare drive Any global spare drive assigned to logical drive Rebuild using the global spare drive Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time enabled Waiting for spare drive to be added or manual rebuild Has the failed drive been Yes Rebuild using the replaced new drive Keep detecting if drive has been replaced or spare drive has been added FIGURE 9 1 Automatic Rebuild Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 5 9 3 2 Manual Rebuild When a user applies forced manual rebuild th
88. Dual loop provides path redundancy and greater throughput Controller communications over Fibre Channel Selectable either through dedicated loops or all drive loops This allows a more flexible configuration of redundant controllers 1 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1 4 5 Scalability The Fibre Channel architecture brings scalability and easier upgrades to storage Storage expansion can be as easy as cascading another expansion unit to a configured RAID array without powering down the running system The maximum number of expansion units supported by a single Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel array is m Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Up to 8 expansion units m Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Up to 5 expansion units Note Do not mix the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC expansion units with Sun StorEdge 3511 FC arrays or vice versa Connect only Sun StorEdge 3510 FC expansion units to Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and connect only Sun StorEdge 3511 FC expansion units to Sun StorEdge 3511 FC arrays Up to 125 devices can be configured in a single FC loop By default the array provides two drive loops and four host loops and operates in Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL and fabric topologies 1 5 Fibre Channel Architecture Each RAID array has six Fibre Channels with the following defaults m Channels 0 1 4 and 5 are host channels connected to servers Any Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array hos
89. Edit SCSI Drives D 5 D 4 View and Edit SCSI Channels D 6 D 5 View and Edit Peripheral Devices D 7 D 6 Save NVRAM to Disk and Restore From Disk D 8 E Cable Pinouts E 1 E 1 RJ 45 Connector E 1 E 2 DB9COM port E 2 F Configuring a Sun Server Running the Solaris Operating Environment F 1 F1 Setting Up the Serial Port Connection F 1 F2 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Solaris Host F 2 F3 Redefining the Baud Rate for the tip Command F 3 F4 Using the tip Command for Local Access to the Array F 4 x Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 ES Determining the WWN in the Solaris Operating Environment F 4 Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server G 1 G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 Setting Up the Serial Port Connection G 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server G 5 Enabling a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server to Recognize New Devices and LUNs G 5 Determining the World Wide Name for Windows 200x Servers and Windows 200x Advanced Servers G 10 Configuring a Linux Server H 1 H 1 H 2 H 3 H 4 H 5 H 6 H 7 H 8 H 9 Setting Up the Serial Port Connection H 1 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Linux Server H 3 Checking the Adapter BIOS H 4 Multiple LUN Linux Configuration H 5 Making an ext3 File System for Linux H 6 Creating a File System H 7 Creating a Mount Point and Mounting
90. Escape until a screen is displayed that says Configuration setting modified Highlight Save changes and press Return Return to the Fast UTIL Options Highlight Scan Fibre Devices and press Return This menu option scans all 126 channels to see if there are any devices attached the devices are displayed after the scan If there are no devices attached it takes some time to scan If there are devices attached the scan usually finds them right away If you are satisfied with the configuration press Escape until you get to Configuration Settings Highlight Exit Fast UTIL and press Return A screen is displayed that says Exit Fast UTIL Highlight Reboot System and press Return The server reboots H 4 Multiple LUN Linux Configuration By default the Linux kernel does not support multiple LUNs To support multiple LUNs modify the kernel with the following steps Appendix H Configuring a Linux Server H 5 Log in as root or su to root if you are logged in as a user Add this line to the end of the etc modules conf file and save the file options scsi_mod max_scsi_luns 255 At the system prompt enter this command and press Return mkinitrd f boot initrd 2 4 9 e 3 img 2 4 9 e 3 The 2 4 9 e 3 entries refer to the current kernel To find out your current kernel type uname r and substitute your kernel information in place of the 2 4 9 e 3 entries Reboot the server To halt the s
91. Family RAID Firmware User s Guide For battery charging status in the initial window see Battery Status on page 8 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to select the VT100 terminal emulation mode and then press Return to enter the Main Menu 6 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Use the following keys to navigate within the application eats Return or Enter Esc Ctrl L Ctrl key and L key together Press a letter as a keyboard shortcut for commands which include a boldface capital letter Date and time To select options To perform the selected menu option or display a submenu To return to the previous menu without performing the selected menu option To refresh the screen information To access a Main Menu command quickly Controller name or inquiry string Cache status Cache Status Clean BAT 1 MB S Gauge range 16 26 38 46 58 68 70 88 28 1800 Transfer rate indicator Navigation keys PC GraphiclANSI Mode gt Terminal lt UT1 Mode gt PC Graphic lt ANSI Color Mode gt Show Transfer Rate Show Cache Status Arrow Keys Move Cursori amp Rate Range iEnter Main MenuiCtrl L Refresh Screen FIGURE 6 1 view view view view view view view and and and and and and and Initial Firmware Window lt uick installation edit edit edit edit edit edit edit Main Menu gt
92. Fibre Channel loop between the host computer and the array In active to active redundant controller mode the primary loop serves the I O traffic directed to the primary controller and its pair loop serves the I O traffic to the secondary controller The host side management software directs I O traffic to the pair loop if one of the redundant loops fails 1 5 1 2 Active to Active Redundant Controller Since each fibre interface supports only a single loop ID two HBAs are necessary for active to active redundant controller operation Using two HBAs in each server ensures continued operation even when one data path fails In active to active mode the connection to each host adapter should be considered a data path connecting the host to either the primary or the secondary controller One adapter should be configured to serve the primary controller and the other adapter to serve the secondary controller Each target ID on the host channels should be assigned either a primary ID or a secondary ID If one controller fails the remaining controller can inherit the ID from its counterpart and activate the standby channel to serve host I O 1 5 1 3 Host Redundant Paths The controller passively supports redundant fibre loops on the host side provided that the host has implemented software support for this feature In the unlikely event of controller failure the standby channels on the remaining controller become an I O route serving the host I O o
93. JBOD Support To monitor peripheral device conditions and events on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array from the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Console you first need to enable JBOD support See Enabling Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Support on page B 11 for the procedure for enabling JBOD support Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter supports standalone JBOD arrays However triggered event notification is limited to environmental failures and hard drive failures Sun StorEdge CLI The Sun StorEdge CLI supports JBOD arrays However because JBOD arrays do not have a RAID controller to manage the disks this command line interface support is limited to the following commands about download pld firmware download ses firmware exit help quit select show frus show inquiry data show pld revision show ses devices version Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for information about using these commands Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 5 B 6 Setting the Loop ID on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array When a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array is directly attached to a host unique hard assigned loop IDs are assigned to each drive in the JBOD array A loop ID is the decimal version of an AL_PA The lowest number loop ID is the lowest priority address on the loop On the left front side of a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array
94. M StorEdge Configuration Service Console File View Configuration Array Administration Help Oreo Main view FEE item Q kw HBA Card 1 Ch 0 Id 0 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB Ch 0 Id 1 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB Ch 0 Id 8 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB Ch 0 Id 9 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB Ch 0 Id 15 SUN StorEdge 3310 D Server 206 235 238 67 falcon discovery completed In a split bus configuration each port is connected to its own HBA as shown in the following example veg Sun TM StorEdge Configuration Service Console File View Configuration Array Administration Help Birla Main View REEE f literriem 206 235 238 67 falcon W HBA Card 1 GZA ch 0 Id 8 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB 2H Ch 0 Id 9 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB SH ch 0 Id 15 SUN StorEdge 3310 D HBA Card 2 MZA ch 0 Id 8 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB KZ ch 0 Id 9 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB B 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 B 9 Downloading Firmware to Disk Drives in a JBOD For instructions on how to download firmware to disk drives in a JBOD directly attached to a host refer to the README file in the patch that contains the firmware B 10 Resizing LUNs Greater than 1 TByte When a LUN is created larger than 1 TByte the Solaris operating system identifies the LUN as an EFI drive If th
95. P link status RAID Controller Status SFP Speed FIGURE 7 4 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array I O Controller Module and Battery Module LEDs Chapter 7 Checking LEDs 7 5 FIGURE 7 5 and FIGURE 7 6 show I O expansion modules and their LEDs for the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC expansion unit and the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC expansion unit PEE o OA Ee e orsa A _ _ Bese ory to o W amp S 2 SE SFP link status RAID controller status I O activity SFP speed FIGURE 7 5 I O Expansion Module for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Expansion Unit co BO 2 2 GB ONLY ove pave Loopa OOB C 2 GB ONLY DAVE LOOPA E i 2 WEED Activity LED SFP link status SFP speed FIGURE 7 6 I O Expansion Module for a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Expansion Unit The I O controller module LEDs and their color definitions are shown in TABLE 7 3 TABLE 7 3 I O Controller Module and Battery Module LEDs LED Battery Activity Cache Ethernet link active controller Purpose Status of battery I O activity of host and disk ports Status of memory cache Status of Ethernet link LED Color Definition Solid green Battery charged Blinking green Battery charging Solid amber Battery failed Off Not busy no I O activity Blinking green Busy active I O
96. RAID 1 RAID 1 Se RAID 0 RAID 0 Se ty GB Random quential Random quential Random quential Random quential 250 0 3 8 3 8 4 8 2 8 TABLE 6 5 Maximum Usable Capacity Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Logical Drive Disk Capacity RAID 5 RAID 5 Se RAID 3 RAID 3 Se RAID 1 RAID 1 Se RAID 0 RAID 0 Se Random quential Random quential Random quential Random quential 250 0 500 1908 500 1908 500 2000 500 2000 6 1 8 Reviewing Default Logical Drives and RAID Levels A logical drive is a set of physical drives grouped together to operate under a particular RAID level Each RAID array is capable of supporting as many as eight logical drives A physical drive can be assigned as the local spare drive to one specified logical drive or as a global spare drive that is available to all logical drives in the RAID array Spare drives can be part of an automatic logical drive rebuild Note A spare drive is not available for logical drives with no data redundancy NRAID and RAID 0 The logical drives in an array can have the same or different RAID levels a A logical drive can be further divided into a maximum of 128 partitions m In loop mode the maximum number of partitions is 1024 partitions per RAID array To create a maximum of 1024 partitions see Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only on page 6 37 m In point to point mode the maximum number of partitions is 64 partitions in a redundant configuration
97. RAID configuration each controller has six host ports Two host ports connect to channel 0 FCO Two host ports connect to channel 1 FC1 One host port connects to channel 4 FC4 One host port connects to channel 5 FC5 See FIGURE 4 10 Channels 0 and 1 support 1 Gbit or 2 Gbit data transfer speeds Channels 4 and 5 support 2 Gbit data transfer speeds only If a fabric switch is connected to one port of channel 0 or channel 1 no connections can be made with the other three ports of that channel If channel 0 FCO is connected to a fabric switch for example the second port for channel 0 on that 4 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 controller and both ports on a redundant controller cannot be used Similarly if channel 1 FC1 is connected to a fabric switch the second port on that controller and the two FC1 ports on a redundant controller cannot be used Two hosts can be directly connected to either channel 0 ports FCO or channel 1 ports FC1 but in that configuration host filters are required if you want to control host access to storage wee i es p t i O eT A i a Host channel 4 7 channel 5 Host channelO Host channel 1 An upper port and a lower port are on each host channel FIGURE 4 10 Host Channels on a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 6 3 Default SFP Placement
98. RITAS Volume Manager ASL VERITAS has provided an Array Software Library ASL that must be installed on the same host system as the Volume Manager 3 2 or 3 5 software to enable the software to recognize a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array For the procedure to download the ASL and the accompanying installation guide for the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array from Sun s Download Center refer to the release notes for your array Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 55 6 56 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER 7 Checking LEDs This chapter describes the front and back panel LEDs which display the operating status of all drives and modules Topics covered in this chapter are m LEDs When The Array Is First Powered On on page 7 1 m Front Panel LEDs on page 7 2 m Back Panel LEDs on page 7 4 For troubleshooting flowcharts related to LEDs see Troubleshooting Flowcharts on page 9 14 7 1 LEDs When The Array Is First Powered On With the array powered up but not connected to a server you should see the LED conditions described in TABLE 7 1 TABLE 7 1 Front Panel LED Status When Array Is First Powered On Drive LEDs Solid green Chassis ear LEDs Solid green 7 1 dhe 7 2 Front Panel LEDs The drive LEDs are located between the rows of drives on the front panel as shown in FIGURE 7 1 The system operation LEDs are located on the right
99. S S1 7554C984 NA RAIDi View scsi drives Delete logical drive artition logical drive logical drive Name logical drive Assignments Expand logical drive If the logical drive has not already been partitioned the following message is displayed Partitioning the Logical Drive will make it no longer eligible for membership in a logical volume Continue Partition Logical Drive Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Summary of Array Configuration on page 5 6 6 32 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 Choose Yes to confirm that you want to partition the logical drive if you do not want to include it in a logical volume WARNING Partitioning the logical drive will make it no longer eligible for membership in a logical volume Continue Partition Logical Drive ETTEN No 6 NONE NONE A list of the partitions on this logical drive is displayed If the logical drive has not yet been partitioned all the logical drive capacity is listed as partition 0 5 Select a partition and press Return A partition Size dialog is displayed 6 Type the desired size of the selected partition and press Return ID LU RAID Si
100. SCII interface to display the System Management screen smit a 2 Choose System Storage Management Physical and Logical Storage from the System Management menu 3 Choose Logical Volume Manager from the System Storage Management menu The Logical Volume Manager menu is displayed on the Logical Volume Manager screen You will be using menu options from this menu to create a volume group and then a logical volume within this volume group Appendix Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment l 5 Logical Volume Manager Volume Groups Logical Volumes Physical Volumes Paging Space Volume groups are a way of dividing and allocating disk storage capacity Volume groups can be used to subdivide a large partition of storage into smaller units of usable space called logical volumes Each volume group is divided into logical volumes which are seen by applications as individual disks Logical volumes can contain their own file systems The underlying physical storage in a volume group consists of one or more physical volumes A physical volume can be a single physical disk or a partition of a disk array In this appendix the physical volume is the disk device you identified in Identifying the Device on Which You Will Create a Logical Volume on page I 4 I 5 l 6 Creating a Volume Group Choose Volume Group from the Logical Volume Manager menu Choose Add a Volume Group
101. Select Disable A confirmation message is displayed Select Yes to confirm Caution Whenever you are troubleshooting your array or replacing components there is an increased possibility of data loss To prevent any possible data loss it is recommended that you back up user data to another storage device prior to replacing a disk drive or any other component Before you begin troubleshooting a JBOD or expansion unit check the cables that connect the host to the JBOD or expansion unit Look for bent pins loose wires loose cable shields loose cable casing and any FC cables with 90 degree or more bends in them If you find any of these conditions replace the cable The FIGURE B 4 flowchart provides troubleshooting procedures specifically for JBODs and expansion units For additional troubleshooting flowcharts see Power Supply and Fan Module on page 9 14 and Drive LEDs on page 9 17 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 5A JBOD or expansion unit problem FC mt Replace Switch drive with Is the Drive light Yes gt drive with known Resolved No known drive light No gt Replace drive amber y drive from another green in new again good drive slot slot Yes Yes No y End Is the drive light green in the
102. TE 1T336753FSUN36G 34732 200MB ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G 2 3 gt 18 34732 2 MB GLOBAL STAND BY SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G 2 3 gt SES SUN StorEdge 3510F A Use the arrow keys to scroll through the table Check that all installed drives are listed here 6 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Note If a drive is installed but is not listed it might be defective or installed incorrectly When the power is initially turned on the controller scans all hard drives that are connected through the drive channels If a hard drive was connected after the controller completed initialization use the Scan scsi drive menu option to let the controller recognize the newly added hard drive and configure it Caution Scanning an existing drive removes its assignment to any logical drive All data on that drive is lost 3 To review more information about a drive highlight the drive and press Return Then choose View drive information to view details about that drive Status Vendor and Product ID Ss See carne ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G 5 ON LINE LINE SEAGATE S1T336753FSUN36G Scan scsi drive set slot Number 1 ON LINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G add drive Entry Identify scsi drive ON LINE SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G disk Reserved space 256 mb L STAND BY SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G SES SUN StorEdge 3516F A Additional information is displayed about
103. Topics covered in this chapter are a Comparison of Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Arrays on page 1 2 a Field Replaceable Units FRUs on page 1 5 a Interoperability on page 1 8 m Fibre Channel Technology Overview on page 1 9 m Fibre Channel Architecture on page 1 11 m Additional Software Tools on page 1 13 Note Unless otherwise indicated all features and procedures apply to both the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 1 1 Comparison of Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Arrays FIGURE 1 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Front View Before installing and configuring your array please review the key differences between the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array with SATA listed in TABLE 1 1 Note Although the two products are very similar and have the same general functionality the configurations have important differences TABLE 1 1 Comparison of Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Features Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Applications Best suited for production Best suited for an inexpensive applications where the superior secondary storage application where features of FC technical higher capacity drives are needed which characteristics and performance isa are not mission critical and where requirement This includes the below lower performance and le
104. a drive channel with a redundant controller communication channel PID Primary controller s ID mapping Multiple IDs were applied host channel mode only The ID to which host LUNs are mapped in the host channel mode ID for the primary controller in drive channel mode NA No ID applied Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 11 TABLE 8 5 Parameters Parameters Displayed in the Channel Status Table Continued Description SID DefSynClk DefWid S Term CurSynClk CurWid Secondary controller s ID mapping Multiple IDs Host Channel mode only The ID to which host LUNs are mapped in the host channel mode ID for the secondary controller in drive channel mode NA No ID applied Default bus synchronous clock n GHz Maximum synchronous transfer rate Async Channel is set for asynchronous transfers Not Applicable to Fibre Channel RAID arrays Signal S Single ended L LVD F Fibre Terminator status On Termination is enabled Off Termination is disabled NA For a redundant controller communications channel RCCOM Current bus synchronous clock xx x MHz The current speed at which the channel is communicating Async The channel is communicating asynchronously or no device is detected empty The default bus synchronous clock has changed Reset the controller for changes to take effect Not applicable to Fibre Channel RAID array 8 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installatio
105. al Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs NONE NONE You can create as many as eight logical drives using physical drives on any loop 3 When prompted to Create Logical Drive choose Yes LG ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status O HLN HSB HFL NAME NONE NONE 4 5 6 A pull down list of supported RAID levels is displayed 4 Select a RAID level from the list to assign to the logical drive Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 23 Note RAID 5 is used as an example in the following steps NAME For brief descriptions of RAID levels see Reviewing Default Logical Drives and RAID Levels on page 6 14 For more information about RAID levels refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide 5 Select your member drives from the list of available physical drives and press Return Tag a drive for inclusion by highlighting it and then pressing Return An asterisk mark is displayed in the Slot column of each selected physical drives To deselect a drive press Return again on the selected drive The asterisk disappears Note You must select at least the minimum number of drives required for the selected
106. al drives from the Main Menu choose view and edit scsi Drives and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs The Physical Drive Status Table is displayed with the status of all physical drives in the array Size lt MB gt LG_DRU Vendor and Product ID _ sl 6 RE YVEPA PCC ON LINE SEAGATE 1T336753FSUN36G a 3 gt 34732 266MB a ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G 16 12 34732 200MB 1 ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G 34732 200MB 1 ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G 34732 200MB GLOBAL STAND BY SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G SES SUN StorEdge 3510F A 8 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 8 4 Parameters Displayed in the Physical Drive Status Window Parameters Description Slot User configurable drive slot number This field is blank unless you enter a slot number using view and edit scsi Drive gt set slot Number Chl Channel that is assigned to the drive ID ID of the drive Size MB Drive capacity in megabytes Speed xxMB Maximum synchronous transfer rate of this drive Async The drive is using asynchronous mode LG_DRV x The
107. al port HBA Host computer ei o c edas T n ea o Eia pe comecronen ES 28 aE JBOD array z Eocomecronteos ES FIGURE B 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Attached to a Single HBA Port In this example if the loop ID switch is set to 0 the format command shows 12 drives on this loop ranging from c1t0d0 to c1t11d0 TABLE B 3 Example of 12 Drives Shown on a 12 Disk Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Connected to a Host Over a Single FC Loop Drive Identifier c1t0d0 cilt3d0 cit6dd cit9d0 c1t1d0 cilt4dd0 cit7d0 citi10d0 e1t2d0 clt5dd0 c1t8d0 citi1d0o The drive identifiers are arranged in four columns of three drives each to reflect the physical location of these drives in the JBOD They correspond to the locations of Disk 1 through Disk 12 B 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 B 7 2 Dual Port Connections to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array You can also connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array to both ports on a dual port HBA ports on two single port HBAs or a port on a single port HBA and a single port on a dual port HBA Use host based multipathing software such as VERITAS DMP 3 2 or 3 5 software to manage Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays connected to a host over more than one loop Multipathing software provides full services on multiple paths between the server and the stora
108. allation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns es es v CHL ID 40 lt Primary Contro v v CHL 1 ID 42 lt CSecondary Cont Map Host LUN v CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro Create Host Filter Entr s CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont v Edit Host ID WWN Name List Add from current device list v Manual add host filter entry This step automatically performs a discovery of the attached HBAs Alternatively you can add them manually 6 46 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 From the device list select the WWN number of the server for which you are creating a filter and press Return A confirmation dialog is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LwN Lu LD pRu Partition Size lt MB gt view and edit Logical drives Lun vp pre rarm view and edit logical Volumes oj w of l 1500908 view and edit Host luns CHL ID 40 lt Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont Map Host LUN CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro Create Host Filter Entr CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Host ID WWN Edit Host ID WWN Name List Host ID WWN 6x6666600666323542 ecucecce 9 Choose Yes to confirm A filter configuration screen displays the filter you are creating lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns CHL
109. an fails and the Status field does not display the OK value you must replace the fan and power supply module Cooling elements in the status table can be identified for replacement as shown in TABLE 8 7 TABLE 8 7 Relationship Between Cooling Elements Fans and Power Supply Modules Cooling Element Fan and Power Supply Module Cooling Element 0 FAN 0 PS 0 Cooling Element 1 FAN 1 PS 0 Cooling Element 2 FAN 2 PS 1 Cooling Element 3 FAN 3 PS 1 Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 17 Front of Array FAN 0O FAN 2 FAN 1 FAN 3 PSO Back of Array PS 1 FIGURE 8 1 Cooling Fan Locations 8 4 8 Viewing Event Logs on the Screen A controller event log records events and alarms that occur after the system is powered on The controller can store up to 1000 event log entries The event log records configuration and operation events as well as error messages and alarm events Note The SES logic in each array sends messages to the event log which report problems and the status of the fans temperatures and voltages Caution Powering off or resetting the controller automatically deletes all recorded event log entries 8 18 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Event logs to view the event logs lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Vo
110. and exclude other servers from seeing or accessing the same partition LUN filtering also enables mapping of multiple logical drives or partitions to the same LUN number allowing different servers to have their own LUN 0 LUN filtering is valuable in clarifying mapping when each HBA typically sees twice the number of logical drives when viewed through a hub 6 42 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 WWN1 WWN2 WWNS3 ww TCON TD LUND LONTD 7 210000E085021DT5 2 210000E08B02DE2F XX 3 210000E08B22DE2F xx 03 FIGURE 6 6 Example of LUN Filtering An advantage of LUN filtering is that it allows many hosts to attach to an array through a common Fibre Channel port and still maintain LUN security Each Fibre Channel device is assigned a unique identifier called a world wide name WWN A WWN is assigned by the IEEE and stays with the device for its lifetime LUN filtering uses the WWN to specify which server is to have exclusive use of a specific partition Note It is possible to see somewhat different information when a fabric switch queries the WWN of the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array When the RAID controller does a Fibre Channel fabric login to a switch during the fabric login process the switch obtains the WWN of the RAID controller This WWN presented by the RAID controller is a Dot Hill Systems Corporation WWN so the switch displays this company name When the
111. anual May 2004 3 Scroll down the listing to see the Fibre Channel devices and the related WWNs Window Edit Options Help falcon luxadm probe Found Fibre Channel device s Node WWN 200000cOFfFf100010 Device Type Disk device Logical Path dev rdsk c6t220000COFF100010d0s2 Node WWN 201000cOFFO000010 Device Type Disk device Logical Path dev rdsk c6t221000COFFO00010d0s2 FIGURE F 2 Worldwide Name Information Displayed by the luxadm command Appendix F Configuring a Sun Server Running the Solaris Operating Environment F 5 F 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX G Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server This appendix provides platform specific host installation and configuration information to use when you connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array to a host running the Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 Advanced Server Windows 2003 Server or Windows 2003 Advanced Server operating system For convenience these platforms will be referred to collectively in this document as Windows 200x server d The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Arrays supports Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server Service Pack 3 or greater in dual path configurations using Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 failover drivers for Microsoft Windows 2000 If you are going to use dual path instead of single path configura
112. ate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss Over 97 charged adequate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss Your lithium ion battery should be changed every two years if the unit is continuously operated at 25 degrees C If the unit is continuously operated at 35 degrees C or higher the battery should be changed every year The shelf life of your battery is three years Note The RAID controller has a temperature sensor which shuts off battery charging when the temperature reaches 54 degrees C When this happens the battery status might be reported as BAD but no alarm is written to the event log because no actual battery failure has occurred This behavior is normal As soon as the temperature returns to the normal range battery charging resumes and the battery status is reported correctly It is not necessary to replace or otherwise interfere with the battery in this situation For more information see Environmental Requirements on page 2 3 for the acceptable operating and nonoperating temperature ranges for your array For information about the date of manufacture and how to replace the battery module refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 3 8 3 Silencing Audible Alarms An audible alarm indicates that either a component in the array has failed or a specific controller event has occurred Er
113. ately You are responsible for ensuring that the site consistently conforms to all stipulated standards and that necessary peripherals are made available to the engineer during installation Review the details of your specific survey before installing your Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array If necessary attach or sketch a network diagram to the survey Chapter 2 Site Planning 2 7 TABLE 2 4 Preinstallation Worksheet Rackmounting Customers must ensure that the appropriate service outlets are available for installation Requirements vary Will the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 Array be rackmounted Yes No e Is the rack supplied by Sun Microsystems Inc Yes No e If yes include Sun model number ____ e If not make model f Does the rack mount e Front and back If so depth e Center Telco What cable lengths are required Are there any power strips or power sequencers in the rack Yes No Are they supplied by Sun Microsystems Inc Yes No If yes part number If not quantity of plugs outlets required IP address Array IP address Array network mask Cabling Fiber optic cable lengths to connect to hosts 2 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 2 5 Host and Fabric Switch Connectivity Summarized Host or Fabric Switch Connectivity Host or Fabric Switch 1 Host or fabric switch name Host or fabric switch make model HBA c
114. ation information is stored in the disk reserved space of all drives that have been configured into logical drives Saving your NVRAM controller configuration to a file provides a backup of the controller dependent configuration information such as channel settings host IDs FC protocol and cache configuration It does not save LUN mapping information The NVRAM configuration file can restore all configuration settings but does not rebuild logical drives Note A logical drive must exist for the controller to write NVRAM content onto it 1 Choose system Functions Controller maintenance Save nvram to disks A confirmation dialog is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices v Download Firmware v M Advanced Maintenance Functions c ERATA R R Save NURAM To Disks S Yes No 2 Choose Yes to confirm A prompt confirms that the NVRAM information has been successfully saved To restore the configuration see Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 8 20 6 52 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 If you prefer to save and restore all configuration data including LUN mapping information use Sun StorEdge Conf
115. ation mode to random significantly reduces the supported size of the logical drives to 512 GB Before creating or modifying logical drives select the optimization mode for all logical drives you create The optimization mode determines the block size used when writing data to the drives in an array m Sequential I O uses large blocks of data a 128 Kbyte for RAID 0 1 and 5 logical drives a 16 Kbyte for RAID 3 logical drives m Random I O uses small blocks of data a 32 Kbyte for RAID 0 1 and 5 logical drives a 4 Kbyte for RAID 3 logical drives Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 11 6 1 7 Note Your array is preconfigured with Sequential Optimization If Random Optimization is more appropriate for your use you need to delete all of the preconfigured logical drives change the optimization mode reboot the array and then create new logical drives The type of application accessing the array determines whether random or sequential I O should be applied Video and imaging application s I O size can be 128 256 512 Kilobyte or up to 1 Mbyte so the application reads and writes data to and from the drive as large block sequential files Database and transaction processing applications read and write data from the drive as small block randomly accessed files There are two limitations that apply to the optimization modes m One optimization mode must be applied to all logical drives in an array m Once the optimization
116. ause the drive still has data on it from a logical drive When a logical drive is deleted properly this user information is erased and the drive status is shown as FRMT rather than USED A drive with FRMT status has been formatted with either 64 KB or 256 MB of reserved space for storing controller specific information but has no user data on it If you remove the reserved space using the view and edit Scsi drives menu the drive status changes to NEW To replace BAD drives refer to Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement on page 9 8 If two drives show BAD and MISSING status see Recovering From Fatal Drive Failure on page 9 11 Note If a drive is installed but not listed the drive might be defective or installed incorrectly Note When power is turned on the controller scans all physical drives that are connected through the drive channels If a physical drive is connected after the controller completes initialization use the Scan scsi drive submenu option to let the controller recognize the newly added physical drive so you can configure it as a member of a logical drive or as a spare drive Channel Status Table To check and configure channels from the Main Menu choose view and edit Scsi channels and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and
117. availability because it eliminates a single point of failure the controller In a dual controller configuration if the primary controller fails the array automatically fails over to the second controller without an interruption of data flow Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC array I O controller modules are hot serviceable Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array RAID controller modules provide six Fibre Channel ports Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array I O controller modules provide eight Fibre Channel ports Single and dual controller models are available with the dual controller version supporting active passive and active active configurations Each RAID controller is configured with 1 gigabyte Gbyte of cache Chapter 1 Product and Architecture Overview 1 5 In the unlikely event of an I O Controller Module failure the redundant RAID controller immediately begins servicing all I O requests The failure does not affect application programs Each RAID I O controller module can support up to 1 gigabyte of Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory SDRAM with Error Control Check ECC memory In addition each controller supports 64 megabytes Mbyte of on board memory Two Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC controller chips handle the interconnection between the controller bus DRAM memory and Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI internal buses They also handle the interface between the on board 2 Mbyte flash 32 Kbyte nonvolatile random access me
118. available Max LV 255 Cur LV 0 Open LV 0 Max PV 16 Cur PV 1 Act PV T Max PE per PV 2167 VGDA 2 PE Size Mbytes 4 Total PE 2167 Alloc PE 0 Free PE 2167 Total PVG 0 In the output of vgdisplay the Total PE field displays the number of physical extents in the volume group The size of each physical extent is displayed in the PE Size field the default is 4 MB so the total capacity of this volume group is 2167 x 4 MB 8668 MB The Alloc PE field shows the number of physical extents allocated to logical volumes At this point the Alloc PE field is zero because we have not assigned any of this volume group s capacity to logical volumes Appendix J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment J 9 J 8 Creating a Logical Volume To create a logical volume within the volume group use the lvcreate command with the L option to specify the size of the logical volume in megabytes The logical volume size should be a multiple of the physical extent size In this example a logical volume of 4092 MB is created lvcreate L 4092 dev vg02 Both character and block device files for the new logical volume are created in the volume group directory ls dev vg02 group lvol1 rlvol1 Applications should use these names to access the logical volumes Unless you specify otherwise HP UX creates names in the form shown in the example To specify custom names for logical volumes see vgcreate
119. ay and 3510 AC RAID refers to an alternating current version of a RAID array Similarly using a UNIX command such as probe scsi all1 provides similar Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 information using an A designator for RAID arrays and a D designator for disks in a JBOD array For example StorEdge 3510F D1000 identifies a JBOD array with SES firmware version 1000 and StorEdge 3510F A1000 identifies a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC RAID array with firmware version 1000 For a list of supported racks and cabinets refer to the release notes for the model of array that you are installing You can find these release notes at http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3510 or http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3511 Reliability availability and serviceability RAS are supported by a Redundant components a Notification of failed components Components that are replaceable while the unit is online For information about specifications and agency approvals see Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Specifications on page A 1 1 2 1 2 1 Field Replaceable Units FRUs This section describes the FRUs contained in the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Arrays RAID I O Controller Modules A dual controller configuration offers increased reliability and
120. ay Default Configurations 6 15 6 1 9 Completing Basic Configuration 6 16 6 1 10 Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte 6 17 6 1 11 Deleting Logical Drives 6 19 6 1 12 Creating Logical Drives 6 21 6 1 13 Changing a Logical Drive Controller Assignment Optional 6 28 6 1 14 Creating or Changing a Logical Drive Name Optional 6 30 6 1 15 Partitioning a Logical Drive Optional 6 31 Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to Host LUNs 6 35 6 2 1 Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only 6 37 6 2 2 Using the Map Host LUN Option 6 37 6 2 3 Setting Up Host Filter Entries 6 42 6 2 3 1 Creating Host Filter Entries 6 44 6 2 4 Creating Device Files for the Solaris Operating Environment 6 51 6 2 5 Saving Configuration NVRAM toa Disk 6 52 Using Software to Monitor and Manage the Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array 6 53 6 3 1 Other Supported Software 6 54 6 3 2 Enabling VERITAS DMP 6 54 6 3 3 The VERITAS Volume Manager ASL 6 55 Checking LEDs 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 LEDs When The Array Is First Powered On 7 1 Front Panel LEDs 7 2 7 2 1 Correcting SES or PLD Firmware Version Conflicts 7 4 Back Panel LEDs 7 4 7 3 1 I O Controller Module LEDs 7 5 7 3 2 Power Supply and Fan Module LEDs 7 8 Contents vii 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 1 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 Quick Installation Reserved 8 2 Battery Operation 8 2 8 2 1 Battery Status 8 2 Silencing Audible Alarms 8 4 Checking Status Windows 8 6 8 4 1 Lo
121. bitrated loop requires an AL_PA the Arbitrated Loop Physical Address The host Fibre Channel supports a single hard loop ID in the range from 0 to 125 The drive channel allows up to 125 devices to be connected to a single loop The controller supports automatic loop ID assignment on the drive channel A hard loop address ID is assigned to the disk drives by setting the radial switch Firmware Host Side Connection Mode The controller default is Loop Only in Host side Parameters Firmware LUN Filtering RAID Based Mapping LUN filtering is a method used for separating and controlling access to data from the RAID controller One major benefit of Fibre Channel is the capability to share a common storage pool with multiple servers or workstations However allocation becomes an issue when every server in a network can access the data in a logical drive LUN filtering provides a means for controlling data access if data is not allowed for every server When you map a logical drive to a host LUN through the firmware application you can create a mapping according to the WWPN port names that are specific to each host adapter A LUN mask can then be created as an access filter for including or excluding host adapters from addressing specific storage unit A host map is composed of an ID range that is configured to include one or more IDs A host adapter can be identified by its ID device specific port names as included or excluded from
122. ble units Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 3 4 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 3 5 filter entries host 6 42 firmware controller failure 9 2 controller voltage and temperature 8 13 initial window 6 2 logical drive status 8 6 manual rebuild 9 6 navigation keys 6 3 SCSI channel status 8 10 SCSI drive status 8 8 upgrading 8 22 view event logs 8 18 Flash All Drives command 9 9 flash drive time command 9 9 flashing all SCSI drives 9 11 selected SCSI drives 9 9 format command 6 35 Front Panel LEDs 7 2 FRUs 1 5 H hardware PLD code version conflict 7 4 hardware specifications A 3 Host and Drive Channels 4 11 host bus adapter connecting to 4 28 host channel connecting two host to one channel 5 20 limitations 5 20 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 4 14 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 4 14 host channels 4 11 data transfer speed Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 4 14 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 4 14 limitations 4 14 host configuration Linux H 1 Solaris operating environment F 1 Windows 2000 G 1 Windows NT B 1 C 1 K 1 host connections 4 28 Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration command 6 18 host filter 6 42 Host Filter Entries 6 42 host IDs adding 6 8 host IDs creating 6 8 host LUNs not visible 9 2 host port Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 4 14 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 4 14 humidity 2 3 l I O controller module 1 5 ID switch 4 26 B 6 Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement 9 8 identifyin
123. bles Replace the SFPs Replace the drives Replace the HBAs Often you can also find out what does cause a hardware problem by determining the elements that do not cause it Start out by testing the smallest configuration that does work and then keep adding components until a failure is detected To view error messages reported by JBODs or expansion units use any of the following m Message log in the operating system a For Solaris var adm messages a For Linux var log message For Microsoft Windows use the event viewer m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service event log m Sun StorEdge CLI event log m For expansion units the RAID firmware event log For more information about replacing the chassis I O module or controller refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide Caution When you rotate or replace drives make sure that All I O is stopped The Periodic Drive Check Time setting in the firmware application is set to disabled this is the default setting This prevents automatic drive rebuild which is not recommended for live systems or troubleshooting To disable the Periodic Drive Check Time Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 15 B 16 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Periodic Drive Check Time A list of Periodic Drive Check Time intervals is displayed
124. cal Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization A 7 14 67 33 2002 i t2402 LG E Logical Drive ALERT Initialization Failed A te ETETA 21811 LG Log ical Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization un Apr 7 14 69 19 2002 2 Initialization of Logical Drive Completed A 14 19 42 2662 P 21811 LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization 2 Clear Above 10 Event Logs Drive Completed Starting Initialization 4 Choose Yes to clear the recorded event log entries Note Resetting the controller clears all recorded events To retain event log entries after controller resets you can install and use the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program 8 9 8 20 Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk If you have saved a configuration file and want to apply that same configuration to another array or reapply it to the array that had the configuration originally you must be certain that the channels and IDs in the configuration file are correct for the array where you are restoring the configuration The NVRAM configuration file restores all configuration settings channel settings and host IDs but does not rebuild logical drives See Saving Configuration NVRAM to a Disk on page 6 52 for information about how to save a configuration file including advice on saving controller dependent configuration information whenever a configuration change is made See Record of Setting
125. cal drives per RAID array 8 Maximum number of partitions per logical drive 128 Maximum number of LUNs assigned to each host ID 32 Using the Map Host LUN Option Each storage resource partition or logical drive must be mapped to a host LUN When you use the Map Host LUN option all servers connected to a mapped host channel have full read write access the storage resource If you need to control access to storage resources by multiple hosts on a loop use the host filter command See Setting Up Host Filter Entries on page 6 42 Note You can also use the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program to map host LUNs Refer to Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for more information To map a logical drive partition to a LUN perform the following steps Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 37 6 38 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs A list of available channels and their associated controllers is displayed 2 Select a channel and host ID on the primary controller and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives
126. ccce 9 Repeat Step 4 through Step 8 to map additional partitions to host LUNs on this channel and logical drive 10 Press Escape 11 If you are LUN mapping a redundant configuration repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to map partitions to host LUNs with other host ID on the logical drive assigned to the primary controller Note If you are using host based multipathing software map each partition to two or more host IDs so multiple paths will be available from the partition to the host 12 Repeat Step 2 through Step 11 if you want to map hosts to the 13 From the Main Menu choose system Functions Reset controller and choose Yes to confirm The controller is reset and the new configuration settings are implemented Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 2 3 14 To verify unique mapping of each LUN unique LUN number unique DRV number or unique Partition number a From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns b Select the appropriate controller and ID and press Return to review the LUN information A mapped LUN displays a number and a filtered LUN displays an M for masked LUN in the host LUN partition window Setting Up Host Filter Entries For multiple servers connected to the same loop on the array LUN filtering organizes how the partitions are accessed and viewed from host devices LUN filtering is used to provide exclusive access from a server to a partition
127. ce on which you want to create a logical volume For example hdisk7 l 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 3 Verify that the disk you ve identified is the one you want lscfg v 1 device name Detailed information about the device you specified is displayed 4 Examine the manufacturer information and model information to make sure you have specified the device you want Using SMIT to Enable an AIX Host to Recognize New LUNs The simplest way to configure your IBM AIX host to use your array is to use the System Management Interface Tool SMIT SMIT can be used with a graphical user interface GUI if your host is configured with a graphics card or if you want to export your display to an X Windows terminal SMIT can also be used with an ASCII interface that can be accessed through an ASCII terminal or console window on another system on the network Because the ASCII interface is available on all systems it is used as an example in the remainder of this appendix but either interface can be used to perform the procedures described here In addition the same operations can be performed directly from the command line using standard AIX system administration commands Note Use the Enter key when you have finished filling out a screen to advance to the next screen Use the keystroke combinations shown on the screen to move back to previous screens 1 Start SMIT using the A
128. contents sheet in your product package The contents sheet summarizes the standard contents for your product See Checking the Package Contents on page 3 3 for more information Compare the packing slip and the list of parts with the items you received If the list of parts on your packing slip does not match the items you received or any items appear damaged immediately notify your carrier agent and the supplier who prepared your shipment Carefully examine the cables provided in the package If any cable appears to be damaged contact the technical service department for an immediate replacement Check the list of Customer Provided Cables on page 3 5 These are required to complete your installation Note You must purchase or provide fiber optic cables for connecting Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays to host servers Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 37 DA Checking the Package Contents Inspect your Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array packages for standard items as well as purchased options before you begin installation If any parts are missing or damaged contact your sales representative immediately Standard Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array Package Quantity Item 1 One or more of the following arrays e Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array with single controller e Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array with dual cont
129. creen press W to save the configuration and exit fdisk Your partition is ready for a file system now H 6 Creating a File System 1 Log in as root or su to root if you are logged in as a user 2 Take the device that you ran fdisk on and run the following command to create an ext3 file system mkfs t ext3 dev sdb x where x is the partition on which you are creating a file system Replace x with 1 because there is only one partition Appendix H Configuring a Linux Server H 7 H 7 Creating a Mount Point and Mounting the File System Manually 1 Go to the directory where you want to create a directory that will be the mount point Then type the following command mkdir name 2 To mount your file system type the following mount dev sdb x directory path where x is 1 for this partition and the directory path is the directory that was created and its location H 8 Mounting the File System Automatically You can label the partition so that it can be entered in the fstab file for mounting the partition automatically at bootup The use of the label and fstab file is a faster operation than mounting the file system manually with a device path 1 Type the following command to add a label to the partition e2label dev sdb x directory path where x is 1 for this partition and directory path is the directory that was created and its location 2 Edit the etc fstab
130. ct label the drive is labelled with the updated firmware version a Upgrading Firmware Using the Serial Port Connections from Microsoft Windows hosts The firmware can be downloaded to the RAID controller by using an ANSI VT100 compatible emulation program The emulation program must support the ZMODEM file transfer protocol Emulation programs such as HyperTerminal Telix and PROCOMM Plus can perform the firmware upgrade 8 24 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 6 4 8 6 4 1 8 6 4 2 Installing Controller Firmware Upgrades From the Firmware Application Windows Only You can use a Microsoft Windows terminal emulation session with ZMODEM capabilities to access the firmware application To upgrade the RAID controller firmware through the serial port and the firmware application perform one of the following procedures Install Boot Record and Firmware Binary Establish the serial port connection Choose system Functions gt Controller maintenance Advanced Maintenance Functions Download Boot Record and Firmware Set ZMODEM as the file transfer protocol of your emulation software Send the Boot Record Binary to the controller In HyperTerminal go to the Transfer menu and choose Send file If you are not using HyperTerminal choose Upload or Send depending on the software After the Boot Record Binary has been downloaded send the Firmware B
131. customer is responsible for meeting all government codes and regulations concerning facilities The customer is also responsible for compliance with the following requirements Meeting all local national and international codes covered in Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Specifications on page A 1 The subjects covered include fire and safety building and electrical codes Documenting and informing Sun Microsystems Inc of any deviations from Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Specifications on page A 1 Den Safety Precautions For your protection observe the following safety precautions when setting up your equipment m Follow all safety precautions and requirements specified in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Safety Regulatory and Compliance Manual m A fully loaded array weighs over 59 pounds Use two people to lift the array to avoid injury m Follow all cautions and instructions marked on the equipment m Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source match the voltage and frequency inscribed on the equipment s electrical rating label m Never push objects of any kind through openings in the equipment Dangerous voltages might be present Conductive foreign objects could produce a short circuit that could cause fire electric shock or damage to your equipment 2 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 2 3 2 3 1 To reduce the risk of el
132. d No No No Yy v v Turn it on Connect it Seat it No No fine EED Secure the ribbon cable on the Yes gt ribbon cable right ear loose Notes No Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly h 3 y Replace chassis Swap the questionable FRU with a known good End FRU from the same array FIGURE 9 4 FC Drive LEDs Flowchart 2 of 2 For more information about checking and replacing drive modules refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide 9 9 3 Front Panel LEDs The following flowchart provides troubleshooting procedures for the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC array front panel LEDs Note The LED ribbon cable referred to in this flowchart is the white cable that connects the front panel LEDs to the midplane It is located on the right front panel ear and is directly attached to the LEDs Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 19 3A Front panel LEDs problem FC Adjust end cap to ensure reset button is not depressed Remove the right end cap Check that the Reset button is not jammed Check that LED ribbon cable in right ear is not loose All front panel LEDs flashing amber Yes gt Replace the end cap Refer to FRU Installation No gt Replace chassis Guide for instructions LEDs stop flashi
133. d to the Solaris operating environment for logical drives larger than 253 Gbyte change the default settings to lt 65536 Cylinders and 255 Heads to cover all logical drives over 253 GB and under the maximum limit The controller automatically adjusts the sector count Then the operating environment can read the correct drive capacity For Solaris operating environment configurations use the values in the following table TABLE6 7 Cylinder and Head Mapping for the Solaris Operating Environment Logical Drive Capacity Cylinder Head Sector lt 253 GB variable default variable default variable default 253 GB 1 TB lt 65536 Cylinders 255 variable default These settings are also valid for logical drives that are smaller than 253 GBytes After settings are changed they apply to all logical drives in the chassis Note Refer to your operating environment documentation for limitations on device sizes To change the Cylinder and Head settings perform the following steps Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 17 1 Choose view and edit Configuration parameters Host Side SCSI Parameters gt Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration Head Ranges Variable gt 255 Heads lt Main Menu gt installation l Maximum Queued I O Count 1024 LUNs per Host SCSI ID 32 Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connection 1024 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connect
134. d will need to be replaced After a logical drive has been created it can be assigned to the secondary controller Then the host computer associated with the logical drive can be mapped to the secondary controller see Using the Map Host LUN Option on page 6 37 To change a logical drive controller assignment 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs 2 Select the drive you want to reassign and press Return 3 Choose logical drive Assignments A confirmation dialog is displayed LG ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status O LN SB FL NAME View scsi drives Delete logical drive Partition logical drive logical drive Name logical drive Sssignments Redundant Controller Logical Drive Assign to Secondary Controller 6 Yes No z f NONE Se a Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 29 4 Choose Yes to confirm A confirmation message is displayed NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to res
135. deny specific hosts access to that LUN by configuring their Filter Type to Exclude Once any host is granted access to the LUN only hosts with explicit access Filter Type set to Include can access that LUN lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns v CHL ID 40 lt Primary Contro CHL 1 42 Secondary Cont CHL 4 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List Logical Drive Partition Host IDAWN 6x6666006000323542 Host ID WWN Mask xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Filter Type Include A Set Filter Type to Exclude res No d To change the access mode which assigns Read Only or Read Write privileges use the arrow keys to highlight Access mode and press Return At the confirmation screen choose Yes and press Return ecucece lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns v v K 40 Primary Contro v CHL 1 ID 42 lt CSecondary Cont v CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro s CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont vj Edit Host ID WWN Name List L Set Access Mode to Read Only v H H Les No F F Access Mode Read Write Name Not Set e To set a name for the filter use the arrow keys to highlight Name and press Return Type the name you want
136. dge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 K 4 Determining the World Wide Name for Windows NT Servers Before you can create host filters you need to know the world wide name WWN for the FC HBA that connects your host to your FC array Boot a specific host system and note the BIOS version and HBA card models connected to your host Access the HBA card s BIOS with the appropriate command AIt Q or Control A are commonly used If the host has multiple HBA cards select the card that is connected to the array Scan the card to look for devices attached to it usually with the Scan Fibre Devices or the Fibre Disk Utility The node name or similar label is the world wide name The following example shows the node name for a Qlogic card ID Vendor Product Rev Node Name Port ID 0 Qlogic QLA22xx Adapter B 210000E08B02DE2F OOOOEF See Setting Up Host Filter Entries on page 6 42 for more information about creating host filters Appendix K Configuring a Windows NT Server K 9 K 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Index A active active configuration 5 2 active standby configuration 5 2 agent Agent Options Management window B 11 alarms failed component description C 1 silencing 8 4 amber blinking on Event LED 7 4 array connecting 4 1 mounting 3 5 automatic rebuild 9 3 B BAD drive status 8 9 bat
137. dge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information about modifying channels 6 1 4 Choosing Loop or Point to Point Fibre Connection To confirm or change the Fibre connection for the array perform the following steps 1 Choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Host side SCSI Parameters gt Fibre Connection Option A menu of fibre connection options is displayed Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 7 2 If you want to view or change the Fibre Connection Option choose either Loop only or Point to point only view lt Main Menu gt Quick installation Maximum Queued I O Count 1624 LUNs per Host SCSI ID 32 Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connection 1624 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def 32 gt Peripheral Device Type Parameters Host _Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration e Fibre Connection Option Point to L Loop onl Driv PERRET RTE Tee Disk Loop preferred otherwise point to point Redu Controller Parameters Caution Do not use the bottom command Loop preferred otherwise point to point This command is reserved for special use and should be used only if directed by technical support A confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Choose Yes to confirm A confirmation message is displayed NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller
138. dows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server G 7 9 Specify the amount of disk space to use or accept the default value and click Next Create Partition Wizard Specify Partition Size How big do you want the partition to be 10 Assign a drive letter if desired and click Next 11 Select Format this partition with the following settings a Specify NTFS as the File system to use G 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Create Partition Wizard Format Partition You can customize the formatting of the partition Specify whether you want to format this partition C Do not format this partition Format this partition with the following settings r Formatting File system to use NTFS ad b Make sure the Perform a Quick Format checkbox is selected xJ Z Allocation unit size Default ba N ew Volume I Enable file and folder compression c Click Next A confirmation dialog box displays the settings you have specified lt Back Cancel Completing the Create Partition Wizard You have successfully completed the Create Partition wizard You specified the following settings Partition type Primary Partiti Disks Selected Disk 2 Partition size 3993 MB Drive letter or path E File System NTFS Allocation Unit Size Default zj Volume Lahek New Violuinne To close this wizard click Finish
139. drive is a physical drive member of logical drive x Status GLOBAL The drive is a global spare drive INITING The drive is initializing ON LINE The drive is in good condition REBUILD The drive is rebuilding STAND BY Local spare drive or global spare drive If the drive is a local spare the LG_DRV column displays the drive number of the logical drive to which the spare is assigned If the drive is a global spare the LG_DRV column displays Global NEW DRV The new drive has not been configured to any logical drive or as a spare drive USED DRV The drive was previously configured as part of a logical drive from which it has been removed it still contains data from that logical drive FRMT DRV The drive has been formatted with reserved space allocated for controller specific information BAD Failed drive ABSENT Drive slot is not occupied or the drive is defective and cannot be detected MISSING Drive once existed but is now missing SB MISS Spare drive missing Vendor and Vendor and product model information of the drive product ID Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 9 8 4 3 A physical drive has a USED status when it was once part of a logical drive but no longer is This can happen for instance when a drive in a RAID 5 array is replaced by a spare drive and the logical drive is rebuilt with the new drive If the removed drive is later reinstalled in the array and scanned the drive status is identified as USED bec
140. e F2 F 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Solaris Host See Redefining the Baud Rate for the tip Command on page F 3 for setting serial port parameters on a Solaris host See Using the tip Command for Local Access to the Array on page F 4 for instructions on using the Solaris operating environment s tip command Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 F 3 Redefining the Baud Rate for the tip Command This section describes a method for using the Solaris operating environment s tip command to access the array Before you can use the tip command you must redefine the baud rate You can perform the following steps or use the tip command with the appropriate command arguments as described in Using the tip Command for Local Access to the Array on page F 4 The tip command uses the 9600 baud specified in the etc remote file on the Solaris host by default The serial port of the array requires 38 400 baud so you must edit the etc remote file and revise your use of the tip command to use the 38 400 baud rate To edit the etc remote file for the 38 400 baud rate perform the following steps In the etc remote file copy and edit the hardwire line as follows Locate the line beginning with hardwire for example hardwire dv dev term b br 9600 e1 C S Q U D ie 0e D Copy the hardwire line into a blank line below the hardwire li
141. e Autosensing AC or DC power supplies e Dual host access in certain configurations e Up to 1752 GB in a RAID array with 146 GB drives e Up to 3 TB in a RAID array with 250 GB drives e 21 in chassis depth e Sun StorEdge 3510 RAID supports up to eight expansion units e Sun StorEdge 3511 RAID supports up to five expansion units e Redundant hot swappable FRUs e Single or redundant active active hot swappable RAID controllers e N 1 hot swappable power and cooling e NEBS Level 3 and HALT test certified designed to meet 99 999 reliability e Web based 10 100BASE T Ethernet support e Serial port out of band support with modem control e RAID Levels 0 1 1 0 3 3 0 5 and 5 0 e Up to 1024 LUNs e SNMP traps and MIB in firmware e 1 GB cache memory standard e Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays include four channels that are user configurable as drive or host channels and two channels are dedicated drive channels e Sun StorEdge 3511 FC arrays include two channels that are user configurable as drive or host channels two channels that are dedicated drive channels and two channels that are dedicated host channels e Support for Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and Diagnostic Reporter management software The following topics briefly describe specific hardware and firmware features Appendix A Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Specifications A 3 A 2 1 A 2 2 A 2 3 A 2 4 Hardware Loop ID Each device communicating on an ar
142. e LUN is later rebuilt to less than 1 TByte it retains the EFI label If you want the LUN to revert back to SMI labeling the format e label command is required To relabel a LUN to less than 1 TByte perform these steps Note In this example the LUN being relabeled is c1t2d3 Type the format command in a terminal window format e devicename At the format gt prompt type label format e c1t2d3 format gt label Two menu items are displayed and you are prompted to choose between them format e c1t2d3 format gt label 0 SMI Label 1 EFI Label Specify Label type 0 Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 13 3 Select option 0 SMI Specify Label type 0 0 4 Respond to the on screen prompts to relabel the device B 11 B 11 1 B 11 2 Troubleshooting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays This section describes troubleshooting procedures and error messages you can use to isolate configuration and hardware problems For additional troubleshooting information refer to the Troubleshooting Your Array chapter in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual Troubleshooting Configuration Issues Follow this sequence of general steps to isolate software and configuration issues Look for storage related messages in var adm messages and identify any suspect Sun StorEdge 3510 FC J
143. e Loop ID on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array on page B 6 Connecting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays on page B 7 Enabling Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Support on page B 11 Downloading Firmware to Disk Drives in a JBOD on page B 13 Resizing LUNs Greater than 1 TByte on page B 13 Troubleshooting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays on page B 14 Converting a JBOD to a RAID array on page B 19 B 1 B 1 Supported Configurations JBOD Arrays A Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array can be attached directly to a single Sun host computer using either single port or dual port configurations See Single Port Connection to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array on page B 8 and Dual Port Connections to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array on page B 9 for more information B 2 Supported Operating Systems JBOD Arrays The Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array can be used with currently released versions of the Solaris 8 operating system and the Solaris 9 operating system B 3 Supported Host Platforms and Connection Methods JBOD Arrays TABLE B 1 lists the Sun systems that are supported by the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array The table also shows the connection methods supported for each of the supported Sun systems Supported HBAs include X 6767A 2 Gbit PCI Single FC HBA and X 6768A 2 Gbit PCI Dual FC HBA TABLE B 1 Supported Sun Servers and Connection Methods JBOD Arrays Server HBA
144. e array is designed for heterogeneous operation and supports the following operating environments m Solaris operating environment versions 8 and 9 m Sun Linux 5 0 on the Sun LX50 server m Red Hat Linux distribution m Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 server a IBM AIX Terminal Menu a HP UX Note For information about supported versions of these operating environments refer to the release notes for your array The array does not require any host based software for configuration management and monitoring which can be handled through the built in firmware application The console window can be accessed via the DB9 communications COM port using the tip command or via the Ethernet port using the telnet command 1 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 Fibre Channel Technology Overview As a device protocol capable of high data transfer rates Fibre Channel simplifies data bus sharing and supports not only greater speed than SCSI but also more devices on the same bus Fibre Channel can be used over both copper wire and optical cable It can be used for concurrent communications among multiple workstations servers storage systems and other peripherals using SCSI and IP protocols When a Fibre Channel hub or fabric switch is employed it provides flexible topologies for interconnections FC Protocols Two common protocols are used to connect Fibre Channel
145. e back of a dual controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array FC devices Management console L LINK S SPEED 10 100 LINK ON 2GB ON roles Clee SOO mm BASN FC CONNECTOR LEDS L2 FC2 TOP SLOT FC3 BOTTOM SLOT FC2 or FC3 FCS OA ose o ol DRIVE Jo o o lo ole t S LOOP L S ea O E sS E S FC device connections application data servers and consoles FIGURE 4 3 Hardware Connections on the Back of a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 5 4 2 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array FIGURE 4 4 identifies the hardware connections on the back of a dual controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array Management console CHARGED CHARGING Hy orty 1GB 2GB 2 GB ONLY FC device connections application data servers and consoles FIGURE 4 4 Hardware Connections on the Back of a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 3 Connecting the Chassis to AC Power Outlets When you connect the AC power cords install the provided two cord locks at the same time The AC cord
146. e channels or raceways m Route interface cables away from motors and other sources of magnetic or radio frequency interference m Stay within the cable length limitations Chapter 2 Site Planning 2 5 Provide two separate power sources for the array These power sources must be independent of each other and each must be controlled by a separate circuit breaker at the power distribution point 2 6 2 Tabletop Placement Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays can be positioned on a desk or a table Follow these guidelines when preparing a tabletop placement for your system Choose a desk or a table that can support 60 pounds for each fully configured array you plan to place on it Do not place the arrays on the edge of the table Set the array so that at least 50 percent of the array is inside the table or desk leg support area Failure to do this might cause the table to tip over Leave enough space in front and in back of the array to access components for servicing To remove the components requires a clearance of 15 inches 37 cm in front and in back of the array Provide a minimum space of 6 inches 15 cm in front and in back of the array for adequate airflow Keep power and interface cables clear of foot traffic Route cables inside walls under the floor through the ceiling or in protective channels or raceways Route interface cables away from motors and other sources of magnetic or radio frequency interference Stay w
147. e controller first determines whether there is a local spare assigned to the logical drive If there is the controller automatically starts to rebuild If no local spare is available the controller searches for a global spare If there is a global spare the controller begins to rebuild the logical drive See FIGURE 9 2 If neither local spare nor global spare is available the controller monitors the channel and ID of the failed drive When the failed drive is replaced the logical drive rebuild begins using the new drive If there is no drive available for rebuilding the controller does not attempt to rebuild until the user applies another forced manual rebuild 9 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 User applies forced manual rebuild Any local spare drive assigned to logical drive Yes Rebuild using the local spare drive Any global spare drive assigned to logical drive Rebuild using the global spare drive Has the failed drive been replaced Rebuild using the new drive FIGURE 9 2 Manual Rebuild 9 3 3 Concurrent Rebuild in RAID 1 0 RAID 1 0 allows multiple drive failure and concurrent multiple drive rebuilds Drives newly replaced must be scanned and configured as local spares These drives are rebuilt at the same time you do not need to repeat the rebuilding process for each drive Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your
148. e deleted partition is added to the partition above the deleted partition Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 2 Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to Host LUNs The next step is to map each partition you created as one system drive host ID LUN The host adapter recognizes the system drives after reinitializing the host bus Note The UNIX and Solaris format and Solaris probe scsi all commands do not display all mapped LUNs if there is not a partition or logical drive mapped to LUN 0 Note The Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program requires that a device be mapped to LUN 0 as a minimum A FC channel can connect up to 16 IDs in loop mode The following figure illustrates the idea of mapping a system drive to a host ID LUN combination m The FC ID is like a cabinet and the drawers are the LUNs LUN is short for logical unit number m Each cabinet ID can have up to 32 drawers LUNs m Data can be stored in the LUNs of the FC ID Most FC host adapters treat a LUN like another FC device m The maximum number of LUNs that can be created for a RAID array is 1024 in loop mode Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 35 m To create a total of 1024 LUNs see Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only on page 6 37 Logical drive 1 Partition 0 LUN 1 Logical drive 0 j Partition 1 Logical drive 1 Parti
149. e drive LED amber Yes gt Check View and Is drive Edit SCSI displayed 7 No gt drives menu Power off Move drive to new slot Power on Check drive to see if it is displayed All drive LEDs amber Be Does drive Yes show bad Replace chassis No Refer to FRU Installation Guide for instructions No Rotate drive into another slot Does problem follow drive No gt No ee Replace drive Continue with 2B Notes Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array FIGURE 9 3 FC Drive LEDs Flowchart 1 of 2 9 18 LED green End Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 2B Drive LEDs problem FC Remove the right end cap Check that the Reset button is not jammed Check that LED ribbon cable in right ear is not loose Refer to FRU Installation All front pane LEDs flashing amber LEDs stop flashing No Replace chassis Guide for instructions Replace the end cap Is the power cord ell seated Are all the LEDs off during operation Is the power switch on Is the power connected Yes Resolved Yes En
150. e to follow the instructions carefully 12 Verify all filter entries and when they are correct press Escape 13 At the confirmation screen choose Yes and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LwN LU LD pRu Partition Size lt MB gt view and edit Logical drives Lun vp pee view and edit logical Volumes wi e l 150000 view and edit Host luns i v CHL ID 40 lt Primary Contro CHL 1 ID 42 CSecondary Cont CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 CSecondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List ecuecece 14 At the server list repeat the previous steps to create additional filters or press Escape to continue lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes 156008 view and edit Host luns CHL ID 40 Primary Contro Map Host LUN Create Host Filter Entr CHL 1 ID 42 Secondary Cont Host ID AWWN 6x8666686600323542 Partition Size lt MB gt CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Contro CHL 5 ID 46 Secondary Cont Edit Host ID WWN Name List ecucecece 6 50 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 15 At the confirmation screen verify the settings choose Yes and press Return to complete the host LUN filter entry lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes CEE and edit Host luns
151. ectric shock do not plug Sun products into any other type of power system Sun products are designed to work with single phase power systems having a grounded neutral conductor Contact your facilities manager or a qualified electrician if you are not sure what type of power is supplied to your building Your Sun product is shipped with a grounding type three wire power cord To reduce the risk of electric shock always plug the cord into a grounded power outlet Do not use household extension cords with your Sun product Not all power cords have the same current ratings Household extension cords do not have overload protection and are not meant for use with computer systems Do not block or cover the openings of your Sun product Never place a Sun product near a radiator or heat register Failure to follow these guidelines can cause overheating and affect the reliability of your Sun product Environmental Requirements TABLE 2 1 Environmental Specifications Operating Nonoperating Altitude To 3000 meters 9000 feet To 12 000 meters 36 000 feet Humidity 10 to 90 RH at 27 degrees C 93 RH 38 degrees C max wet max wet bulb noncondensing bulb temperature noncondensing Temperature Standalone 5 degrees C to 40 degrees C 40 degrees C to 65 degrees C Rack 5 degrees C to 35 degrees C 40 degrees C to 65 degrees C Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC The following is required for all installations All AC mains and su
152. ed 4 1 Caution When positioning the array do not block the air vents at the front or back of the unit Follow all safety precautions specified in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Safety Regulatory and Compliance Manual Caution When you power off an array wait five seconds before you power it back on If you power the array off and on too quickly unexpected results can occur See Power Off Procedure on page 4 30 Converting Your Front Bezel Locks So the Keys Cannot Be Removed The bezel on your array has two locks whose keys can be removed when the locks are in either the locked or open position It is possible to reconfigure the locks so that the keys cannot be removed Bezel locks FIGURE 4 1 Front Bezel and Front Bezel Locks of an Array To change the locks so the keys cannot be removed perform the following steps Remove the bezel by gently pivoting the swing arms out of their ear sockets See Removing the Front Bezel and Ear Caps on page 8 26 for step by step instructions on how to remove the bezel Make sure the key is in the locked position with the pawl extending horizontally past the edge of the bezel Hold the key in place and use a 12 mm or 3 8 inch nut driver to remove the locking nut that holds the pawl in place as shown in the first panel of FIGURE 4 2 4 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Caution Be sure to hold
153. ed host bus adapters refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Release Notes for your array The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays support the HP UX operating environment Level 11 0 and Level 11 i in dual path configurations using Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 failover drivers for the HP UX operating environment Refer to the Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 Installation and User s Guide for the Hewlett Packard HP UX Operating System for detailed instructions about setting up the device driver on the server and for additional information about configuring your HP server Customers interested in Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 for multiplatform support should contact Sun Sales or visit http www sun com sales For more information about multiplatform support see http www sun com storage san multiplatform_support html The information in this appendix supplements the configuration steps presented in Chapter 6 and covers the following steps m Setting Up a Serial Port Connection on page J 2 m Accessing the Firmware Application From an HP Server Running HP UX on page J 3 a Attaching the Disk Array on page J 5 J 1 a Logical Volume Manager on page J 6 a Definitions of Common Terms on page J 6 m Creating a Physical Volume on page J 7 a Creating a Volume Group on page J 7 m Creating a Logical Volume on page J 10 m Creating an HP UX File System on page J 10 m Mounting
154. edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs 8 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 The Channel Status Table is displayed with the status of all channels on the array Chl roae ern s1n petsync x peruia s rern cursyncin curvia T CEES 4G NA AUTO Serial F _ NA 2 35C gt DRU RCC 3 25C gt DRU RCC Note Each controller has a separate RS232 port as well as an Ethernet port This architecture ensures continuous communication should a controller fail Since the connection is established with only one controller even when the array is in redundant mode the CurSyncClk and CurWid settings are displayed for the connected controller Therefore if a user maps one LUN to the primary controller and another LUN to a secondary controller only the LUN mapped with the connected individual controller is displayed through the serial and Ethernet port menu Caution Do not change the PID and SID values of drive channels TABLE 8 5 Parameters Displayed in the Channel Status Table Parameters Description Chl Channel s ID Mode Channel mode RCC Redundant controller communication channel Host The channel is functioning as a host channel DRV The channel is functioning as a drive channel DRV RCC The channel is functioning as
155. elected Drive 9 11 9 5 Recovering From Fatal Drive Failure 9 11 9 6 Using the Reset Push Button 9 13 9 7 Silencing Audible Alarms 9 13 9 8 Modifying Drive Side SCSI Parameters 9 13 9 9 Troubleshooting Flowcharts 9 14 9 9 1 Power Supply and Fan Module 9 14 9 9 2 Drive LEDs 9 17 9 9 3 Front Panel LEDs 9 19 9 94 I O Controller Module 9 24 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Specifications A 1 A 1 Physical Specifications A 2 A 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Highlights A 3 A 3 Agency Approvals and Standards A 5 Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 1 B 1 Supported Configurations JBOD Arrays B 2 B 2 Supported Operating Systems JBOD Arrays B 2 Contents ix B 3 Supported Host Platforms and Connection Methods JBOD Arrays B 2 B 4 Known Limitations Affecting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays B 3 B 5 Using Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Monitoring and Management Tools with JBOD Arrays B 4 B 6 Setting the Loop ID on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array B 6 B 7 Connecting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays B 7 B 8 Enabling Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Support B 11 B 9 Downloading Firmware to Disk Drives ina JBOD B 13 B 10 Resizing LUNs Greater than 1 TByte B 13 B 11 Troubleshooting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays B 14 B 12 Converting a JBOD toa RAID array B 19 C Failed Component Alarm Codes C 1 D Record of Settings D 1 D 1 View and Edit Logical Drives D 2 D 2 LUN Mappings D 4 D 3 View and
156. em downtime however is not affected as severely The time required to replace a controller if one is available is only about five minutes Regardless of configuration customers requiring high availability should stock field replaceable units FRUs such as disk drives and controllers on site Your FC array has been designed to make replacing these FRUs easy and fast Dual Controller Considerations The following controller functions describe the redundant controller operation Both controllers must be exactly the same They must operate with the same firmware version the same size of memory and the same number of host and drive channels If one controller in a dual controller configuration is replaced with 5 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 a field replaceable unit FRU controller the array automatically compares the firmware versions of the two controllers If they differ the FRU controller firmware is automatically changed to that of the existing controller in the array The controller firmware assumes that two controllers are available or might be made available during operation at any time In a 1U single controller configuration a 2U single controller configuration or a 2U dual configuration once the primary controller which might be the only controller is powered on it begins to scan for a second controller Until a second controller is discovered which does not happ
157. en in a 1U single controller configuration or a 2U single controller configuration the Peripheral Device Status for the redundant controller will show a Status of Scanning This is correct behavior and enables the firmware to discover a second controller whenever it is added without the necessity of rebooting the primary controller After booting in a redundant configuration the controllers autonegotiate and designate one controller as primary and the other controller as secondary The two controllers behave as one primary controller Once the redundant configuration takes effect user configurations and settings can be done only on the primary controller The secondary controller then synchronizes with the configuration of the primary controller making the configurations of the two controllers exactly the same The two controllers continuously monitor each other When either controller detects that the other controller is not responding the working controller immediately takes over and disables the failed controller It is necessary to connect all interfaces to both controllers so that a surviving controller can readily continue all services provided for the RAID system For example if you connect one controller to the Ethernet you should also connect the second controller to the Ethernet In an active to active configuration standard configuration you can assign any logical drive to either of the controllers and then map
158. enu 5 Select a controller from the list and press Return By default channel 0 has a primary ID PID and no secondary ID SID while channel 1 has a SID but no PID A list of SCSI IDs is displayed 6 Select a SCSI ID from the list and press Return A confirmation dialog is displayed 6 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 1 6 7 Choose Yes to confirm lt Main Menu gt Quick installation lt To Range 1 gt view and edit Logical drives ID 32 view and edit logical Volumes ID 33 v ID 34 Mode PID SID DefS ynC1k Def Wid S Term CurS ynC1k Cur ip or V Host 40 NA AUTO Serial F NA ID 37 v ID 38 s Host NA 42 AUTO Serialj F NA I v v D 39 ID 40 2 3 C gt DRU RCC 1 Primary Controlle Add Secondary Controller SCSI ID No SCSI ID As IREREITERT ess X Yes o Yes No A confirmation message is displayed NOTICE Change made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now Choose Yes and to reset the controller The configuration change takes effect only after the controller is reset Selecting Sequential or Random Optimization Caution Use the sequential cache optimization option only with the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array Changing a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array s cache optimiz
159. er 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 11 4 6 1 4 6 1 1 Drive Port Connectivity in a Dual Controller Array Drive channels connect to the internal drives in the array and can also connect to drives in external expansion units The key difference between the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC array drive channels is the assignment of two ports for each channel a The Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array has a drive channel assigned to two ports on each I O controller module Each drive channel is a pair of ports on a single I O controller module In a dual controller configuration the top controller has two ports for drive channel 2 and the lower I O controller module has two ports for drive channel 3 a The Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array has a drive channel assigned to one port on each I O controller module in a dual controller configuration Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Arrays Configured for redundancy each controller in a dual controller RAID array has two adjacent dedicated drive channels on one loop to load balance I O operations see FIGURE 4 7 Each drive channel has two SFP ports that can be connected to expansion units Drive channels 2 and 3 access all the disk drives and are interconnected to load balance I O operations Two ports on channel 3 Two drive ports on channel 2 FIGURE 4 7 Dedicated Drive Channels 2 on the Upper Controller and 3 on the Lower Controller in a Dual Controll
160. er FC1 port on that controller and the two FC1 port on a redundant controller cannot be used a If you change the mode to Point to point only and attempt to add a second ID the controller does not allow you to add an ID to the same controller and channel For example if you have ID 40 on CH 0 PID and N A on CH 0 SID the controller does not allow you to add another PID to CH 0 The controller displays a warning if the user is in point to point mode and tries to add an ID to the same channel but on the other controller The warning is displayed because you have the ability to disable the internal connection between the channels on the primary and secondary controller using the set inter controller link CLI command and by doing this you can have one ID on the primary and another ID on the secondary as a legal operation However if you ignore this warning and add an ID to the other controller the RAID controller does not allow a login as a Fabric Loop FL port because this would be illegal in a point to point configuration m The firmware application allows you to add up to eight IDs per channel four IDs on each controller which forces the fabric switch port type to become Fabric Loop To ensure F port behavior full fabric full duplex when attaching to a switch only one ID must be present on each channel and the array port must be set to point to point mode Do not connect more than one port per channel on an array to a fabr
161. er Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array The I O controller module in slot A the upper slot houses drive channel 2 which connects to the 12 internal disk drives through their A ports The I O controller module in slot B the lower slot houses drive channel 3 which connects to the 12 internal disk drives through their B ports 4 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 6 1 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Drive channels 2 and 3 are dedicated drive channels Configured for redundancy each drive channel of the top I O controller module shares a loop with the matching drive channel on the bottom I O controller module For example drive channel 2 of the top I O controller module shares the same loop as channel 2 on the bottom I O controller module see FIGURE 4 8 Each drive channel has two SFP ports that can be connected to expansion units Drive channels 2 and 3 access all the disk drives using internal FC SATA routing technology and are interconnected to load balance I O operations Two drive ports on channel 3 Two drive ports on channel 2 An upper port and a lower port are on each drive channel FIGURE 4 8 Dedicated Drive Channels 2 and 3 on Both Controllers in a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 6 2 Host Port Connectivity in a Dual Controller Array Host channels connect to host computers either directly or through storage switch
162. er the array is powered up power on the IBM server and log in as root or su to root if you are currently logged in as a user Appendix Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment l 3 4 Start the Kermit program and set the parameters as shown Use the device specific name for the serial port you are using In the example the serial port being configured is dev tty0p1 kermit Executing usr share lib kermit ckermit ini for UNIX Good Morning C Kermit 7 0 197 8 Feb 2000 for HP UX 11 00 Copyright C 1985 2000 Trustees of Columbia University in the City of New York Type or HELP for help C Kermit gt set line dev tty0p1 C Kermit gt set baud 38400 dev tty0pl1 38400 bps C Kermit gt set term byte 8 C Kermit gt set carrier watch off C Kermit gt c Connecting to dev tty0pl1 speed 38400 The escape character is Ctrl ASCII 28 FS Type the escape character followed by C to get back or followed by to see other options Note To return to the Kermit prompt type Ctrl and then C To exit Kermit first return to the Kermit prompt and then type exit 3 Identifying the Device on Which You Will Create a Logical Volume 1 Display all the defined disk devices on your system Isdev Cc disk A list of defined disk devices is displayed along with information about those devices 2 Identify the name of the devi
163. erating system without rebooting Run the ioscan and the insf commands to discover the resources and to create their device files Appendix J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment J 5 Logical Volume Manager The Logical Volume Manager LVM is a disk management system provided by HP in all versions of HP UX 11 The LVM allows you to manage storage as logical volumes This section describes some concepts used by the LVM and explains how to create logical volumes on your Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array For more detailed information about the LVM please consult 1vm 7 and the HP publication Managing Systems and Workgroups Guide for HP UX System Administration HP part number B2355 90742 As with many system administration tasks you can use SAM to create and maintain logical volumes However some functions can only be performed with HP UX commands The procedures in this appendix are performed using the command line interface rather than SAM J 6 Definitions of Common Terms Volume groups are HP UX s method for dividing and allocating disk storage capacity Volume groups can be used to subdivide a large partition of storage into smaller units of usable space called logical volumes Each volume group is divided into logical volumes which are seen by the applications as individual disks They can be accessed as either character or block devices and can contain their own file systems The underlying
164. erver completely use shutdown h now To reboot automatically after the shutdown is complete use shutdown r now H 5 Making an ext3 File System for Linux The following procedure for labeling and partitioning drives using fdisk applies to an ext3 file system To discover which disk you want to label you need to determine what device it is To list all devices and their paths start a terminal session and type fdisk 1 Record the device names and paths that you plan to use Type fdisk dev sd x x a b c A banner is displayed for the specified array device The last statement displays a prompt 3 Type m or help H 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 On the displayed menu select n for the command action and press Return Two choices are displayed e extended p primary partition 1 4 Note Only four primary partitions are allowed per array All additional partitions must be added as extended LUNs under one primary partition Only one primary partition is allowed to have extended LUNs 5 For the first partition select p When several options appear keep the defaults You can reconfigure this after you understand the process and see what it looks like Add additional primary partitions and extended partitions as needed 6 After you have completed accepting the defaults and are back at the Command m or help s
165. es or other devices In a default dual controller RAID configuration each controller has four host channels channels 0 1 4 and 5 Port bypass circuits connect each pair of host SFP ports on a host channel as a result each host channel accesses both controllers The main differences between the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays are the number of host ports and the supported speed for each port see TABLE 4 4 Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 13 TABLE 4 4 Number of Host Ports and Supported Host Port Speeds Data Transfer Speed 1 Gbit or 2 Gbit 2 Gbit only 4 6 2 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Maximum of 4 host ports per I O Maximum of 4 host ports FCO and FC1 per I O controller module controller module N A Maximum of 2 host ports FC4 and FC5 per I O controller module Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array In a default dual controller RAID configuration each controller has four host ports Each port connects to one host channel channels 0 1 4 and 5 see FIGURE 4 9 All four host channels support 1 Gbit or 2 Gbit data transfer speeds z Host channel 4 Host channel 5 Host channel 0 Host channel 1 An upper port and a lower port are on each host channel FIGURE 4 9 Host Channels on a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 4 6 2 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array In a default dual controller
166. et the Minicom serial port parameters use the Minicom utility to access the controller firmware with the following steps Appendix H Configuring a Linux Server H 3 1 To start the Minicom program from the terminal window type minicom A pop up window stating Initializing Modem is displayed When initialization is complete the following banner is displayed Welcome to Minicom 2 00 0 Options History Buffer F Key Macros Search History Buffer 118n Compiled on Jun 23 2002 16 14 20 Press CTRL A Z for help on special keys 2 Press Ctrl 1 to connect to the array and access the firmware application 3 In the main screen choose Terminal VT100 Mode and view the Main Menu commands used to configure the array H 3 Checking the Adapter BIOS When booting the server watch for the HBA card BIOS message line to be displayed Then press the proper sequence of keys to get into the HBA BIOS a For FC Qlogic HBAs lt Alt Q gt The keystrokes are listed on the screen when the adapter is initializing After you enter the Qlogic HBA BIOS with Alt Q perform the following steps If your HBA has more than one interface on it they show up in the main screen of the BIOS software after you press Alt Q You have to make the same changes on one interface as the other unless one of the interfaces is going to be bootable If you have more than one interface highlight the top interface listed under Adapter Type and p
167. et the controller now 5 Choose Yes to reset the controller The reassignment is evident from the view and edit Logical drives screen A P in front of the LG number means that the logical drive is assigned to the primary controller An S in front of the LG number means that the logical drive is assigned to the secondary controller For example P0 indicates that logical drive 0 assigned to the primary controller 6 1 14 Creating or Changing a Logical Drive Name Optional You can create a name for each logical drive These logical drive names are used only in RAID firmware administration and monitoring and do not appear anywhere on the host You can also edit this drive name To create a logical drive name 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives 2 Select a logical drive and press Return 3 Choose logical drive Name 4 Type the name you want to give the logical drive in the New Logical Drive Name field and press Return to save the name LG ID uv Rat sizecnp gt Status gu sse erx NAME PO 2543F6D5 NA RAIDS 103430 GOOD Hoe 6 30 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 View scsi drives Delete logical drive Partition logical drive Current Logical Drive Name O A te New Logical Drive Name New Name NONE NONE S 6 1 15 Partitioning a Logical Drive O
168. f codes until you can break down the sequence into its separate alarms You can also check your software or firmware for alarms error messages or logs to isolate and understand the cause For example in the case of a fan failure in a power supply you might first hear the critical component failure alarm followed by a power supply failure alarm from power supply 0 or power supply 1 followed by a fan failure event alarm followed by an event alarm This sequence continues to repeat TABLEC 1 Failed Component Alarm Codes Failure Morse Code Letter Morse Code Sound Pattern Critical component failure 8 dashes or mismatch Power supply 0 failure PO Power supply 1 failure P1 Event alarm E Fan failure F C 2 TABLEC 1 Failed Component Alarm Codes Continued Failure Morse Code Letter Morse Code Sound Pattern Voltage failure V Temperature failure T SES PLD firmware R _ mismatch j See Front Panel LEDs on page 7 2 for more information about the SES PLD firmware mismatch mentioned in TABLE C 1 Caution Be particularly careful to observe and rectify a temperature failure alarm If you detect this alarm shut down the controller and the server as well if it is actively performing I O operations to the affected array Otherwise system damage and data loss can occur Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX D Record of Settings
169. fer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide Caution Whenever you are troubleshooting and replacing components there is an increased possibility of data loss To prevent any possible data loss it is a good idea to back up user data to another storage device prior to troubleshooting your array Power Supply and Fan Module The following flowchart provides troubleshooting procedures for the power supply and fan module 9 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1A Notes eee supply or fan problem A fan can continue to spin normally even when a power supply has failed Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array Front panel power LED Check power Yes gt Replace chassis End amber supply LEDs No isthe LED Secure the Both green Yes ribbon cable on the Yes gt i H ribbon cable right ear loose No Power supply cord plugged in No gt Plug it in Yes t No Resolved Yes No Power supply No LI Turn it on swiitch on Yes y Reseat the power a ies Hi Replace the Resolved No p Power supply with Resolved No known good power supply v Continue with 1B Yes
170. ftware after you assign an IP address to the array For details see Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 and refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide Use a null modem serial cable to connect the COM port of the RAID array to an unused serial port on your host system A null modem cable has serial signals swapped for connecting to a standard serial interface Note A DB9 to DB25 serial cable adapter is included in your package contents to connect the serial cable to a DB25 serial port on your host if you do not have a DB9 serial port Power up the array On the server choose Start Programs Accessories Communications gt HyperTerminal 4 Type a name and choose an icon for the connection G 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 5 In the Connect To window select the COM port from the Connect using drop down menu for that array 2 x Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region United States of America 1 Area code 760 Phone number Connect using Z Cancel 6 Click OK 7 In the Properties window set the serial port parameters using the drop down menus Set serial port parameters to m 38 400 baud a 8 data bits m 1 stop bit m No parity Appendix G Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server G 3
171. fy a failed drive See Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement on page 9 8 for more details For overview information about drive LEDs and how they work see Front Panel LEDs on page 7 2 You can check physical drive parameters using the firmware application From the firmware Main Menu choose view and edit scsi drives For more information about the firmware application refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array Caution When you rotate or replace drives make sure that All I O is stopped The Periodic Drive Check Time setting in the firmware application is set to disabled this is the default setting This prevents automatic drive rebuild which is not recommended for live systems or troubleshooting To disable the Periodic Drive Check Time From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Periodic Drive Check Time A list of Periodic Drive Check Time intervals is displayed Select Disable A confirmation message is displayed Choose Yes to confirm Caution To prevent any possible data loss back up user data to another storage device prior to replacing a disk drive The following flowchart provides troubleshooting procedures for the FC drive LEDs Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 17 C Drive LEDs problem FC 2A Is only on
172. g drives 9 8 Identifying SCSI drive command 9 9 in band connections 5 5 INCOMPLETE status 8 7 initial firmware window 6 2 INITING status 8 7 INVALID status 8 7 IP address setting 4 21 J JBOD single bus configuration B 12 split bus configuration B 12 K keys to navigate 6 3 Index 3 L layout map 2 5 LEDs drives 7 2 front panel 7 2 7 3 rear panel 7 4 limitations controller 5 2 high capacity configuration 4 25 host channels 4 14 local spare assignment 6 25 logical drive 128 LUN limit 6 14 assign local spare 6 25 assign RAID level 6 24 change assignment 6 28 creating 6 21 6 23 defaults 6 14 ID 8 7 larger than 253 Gbyte 6 17 LG number 8 7 maximum number of disks per logical drive Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 6 13 maximum physical capacity 6 25 maximum physical drive capacity 6 25 maximum usable capacity per logical drive 6 13 6 14 minimum requirements 6 16 RAID level 8 7 RAID level selected 6 23 RAID levels defined 6 15 size 8 7 status 8 6 status table 8 6 logical drive preferences 6 25 logical drives deleting 6 19 rebuilding 9 3 logical volume 6 16 loop id setting on expansion units 4 26 B 6 LUN described 6 35 M management tools accessing 5 5 manual rebuild 9 6 map layout 2 5 maximum drive capacity 6 25 maximum number of disks Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 6 13 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array 6 13 MISSING drive status 8 9 Mounting Your FC Array 3 5
173. ge 5 VDC and 12 VDC DC power 48V DC 36 VDC to 72 VDC 2 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 2 Physical Specifications Use the physical specifications in TABLE 2 3 to plan the location of your array TABLE 2 3 Physical Specifications Category Description Dimensions 2U 3 45 inches 8 76 cm height 20 inches 50 8 cm chassis depth 17 5 inches 44 6 cm width 19 inches 48 26 cm with ears Installation clearances For FRU component removal and replacement 15 inches 37 cm is required front and back Cooling clearances 6 inches 15 cm is required front and back No cooling clearance is required on the sides or the top and bottom of the array 2 6 2 6 1 Layout Map It is helpful to create a sketch or layout map to indicate the exact location of the array as well as the location of the hosts console and Ethernet connections that will be connected to it As you lay out the components consider the cable lengths that will be used Rack Placement Follow these guidelines when preparing a rackmount placement for your system m Ensure that the floor surface is level m Leave enough space in front of the rack to access components for servicing m Leave enough space in back of the rack to access components for servicing a Keep power and interface cables clear of foot traffic Route cables inside walls under the floor through the ceiling or in protectiv
174. ge 6 54 Enabling VERITAS DMP on page 6 54 The VERITAS Volume Manager ASL on page 6 55 6 1 Subsequent chapters in this manual describe further procedures used to complete the installation and configuration of the arrays The flexible architecture of the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays makes many configurations possible 6 1 6 1 1 Initial Configuration Steps The topics in this section present both required and commonly used optional procedures which typically apply to both the point to point and loop mode configurations Note If you want to create logical volumes refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Logical volumes are not widely used because they limit the number of available LUNs Configuration of a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array involves using firmware menus to change settings on the array However each host platform requires some initial configuration as well Refer to the appendix for your host platform for instructions on how to connect your host to an array for host specific instructions on recognizing and formatting LUNs including modifying host configuration files and for other platform specific details Viewing the Initial Firmware Window The following window is displayed when you first access the RAID controller firmware of a RAID array which is powered up For detailed information about all components in the initial window see the Sun StorEdge 3000
175. ge system FIGURE B 3 shows an example of a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array with 12 drives connected to a host computer over two loops to two FC ports In this example both ports are on dual port HBAs Host computer JBOD array FIGURE B 3 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Attached to Two HBA Ports When you connect your Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array to a host over two loops the format command shows 24 drives 12 on each loop because the host sees a device entry for each path If the loop switch ID is set to 0 these drives are identified as ranging from c1t0d0 to c1t11d0 and from c2t0d0 to c2t11d0 as shown in TABLE B 4 However there are of course still only 12 physical drives in the JBOD array These drives are arranged in four columns of three drives each as shown in TABLE B 3 Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 9 TABLE B 4 Drive Identifier First Loop Example of 24 Drives Shown on a 12 Disk Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Connected to a Host Over Two FC Loops Drive Identifier Second Loop cl cl cl todo t1do t2d0 1t3d0 1t4d0 1t5d0 1t6d0 1t7d0 1t8d0 1t9d0 1t10d0 1t11d0 c2t0d0o c2t1d0 c2t2d0 c2t3d0 c2t40d0 c2t5d0 c2t6d0 c2t7d0 c2t8do c2t9d0 c2t10d0 c2t11d0 Caution Be careful not to mount the same drive twice if you are not using multipathing software B 7 3 Changing
176. gical Drive Status Table 8 6 8 4 2 Physical Drive Status Table 8 8 8 4 3 Channel Status Table 8 10 8 4 4 Controller Voltage Temperature Status 8 13 8 4 4 1 View Controller Voltage and Temperature Status 8 13 8 4 4 2 Configure a Trigger Threshold 8 13 8 4 5 Viewing SES Status 8 15 8 4 6 SES Temperature Sensor Locations 8 16 8 4 7 Identifying Fans 8 17 8 4 8 Viewing Event Logs on the Screen 8 18 Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk 8 20 Upgrading Firmware 8 22 8 6 1 Patch Downloads 8 23 8 6 2 Installing Firmware Upgrades 8 23 8 6 3 Controller Firmware Upgrade Features 8 24 8 6 4 Installing Controller Firmware Upgrades From the Firmware Application Windows Only 8 25 8 6 4 1 Install Boot Record and Firmware Binary 8 25 8 6 4 2 Install Firmware Binary Only 8 25 8 6 5 Upgrading SES and PLD Firmware 8 26 Replacing the Front Bezel and Ear Caps 8 26 8 7 1 Removing the Front Bezel and Ear Caps 8 26 8 7 2 Placing the Bezel and Ear Caps Back Onto the Chassis 8 27 viii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 1 9 1 RAID LUNs Not Visible to the Host 9 2 9 2 Controller Failover 9 2 9 3 Rebuilding Logical Drives 9 3 9 3 1 Automatic Logical Drive Rebuild 9 3 9 3 2 Manual Rebuild 9 6 9 3 3 Concurrent Rebuild in RAID 1 0 9 7 9 4 Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement 9 8 9 4 1 Flash Selected Drive 9 9 9 4 2 Flash All SCSI Drives 9 10 9 4 3 Flash All But S
177. h on SunSolve that contains the firmware upgrade you want Downloading the patch to a location on your network a Using your array software Sun StorEdge Configuration Service sscli 1M or array firmware in some cases to flash the firmware to the device it updates Note For instructions on how to download firmware to disk drives in a JBOD directly attached to a host refer to the README file in the patch that contains the firmware Caution Be particularly careful about downloading and installing PLD firmware If the wrong firmware is installed or the firmware is installed on the wrong device your controller might be rendered inoperable Always be sure to upgrade your SES firmware first before trying to determine if you need a PLD upgrade 8 22 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 6 1 8 6 2 Patch Downloads 1 Once you have determined that a patch is available to update firmware on your array make note of the patch number or use SunSolve Online s search capabilities to locate and navigate to the patch Read the Readme text file associated with that patch for detailed instructions on downloading and installing the firmware upgrade Follow those instructions to download and install the patch Installing Firmware Upgrades It is important that you run a version of firmware that is supported by your array Caution Before updating your firmwa
178. ibre hubs An arbitrated loop hub is a wiring concentrator Arbitrated means that all nodes communicating over this fibre loop are sharing a 100 megabits per second Mbps segment Whenever more devices are added to a single segment the bandwidth available to each node is further divided A loop configuration allows different devices in the loop to be configured in a token ring style With a fibre hub a fibre loop can be rearranged in a star like configuration because the hub itself contains port bypass circuitry that forms an internal loop inside Bypass circuits can automatically reconfigure the loop once a device is removed or added without disrupting the physical connection to other devices m Fabric switches A fabric switch functions as a routing engine which actively directs data transfers from source to destination and arbitrates every connection Bandwidth per node via a fabric switch remains constant when more nodes are added and a node on a switch port uses an up to 100 Mbps data path to send or receive data 1 4 4 Data Availability Data availability is one of the major requirements for today s mission critical applications Highest availability can be accomplished with the following functionality Hot plug capabilities With proper hardware and software configuration in dual controller mode a failed controller can be replaced online while the existing controller is actively serving I O Dual loop configurations
179. ic switch Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 9 50 2 Caution In point to point mode or in public loop mode only one switch port is allowed per channel Connecting more than one port per channel to a switch can violate the point to point topology of the channel force two switch ports to fight over an AL_PA arbitrated loop physical address value of 0 which is reserved for loop to fabric attachment or both m With four host channels and four host IDs you should load balance the host ID setup so that half the IDs are on the primary controller and half the IDs are on the secondary controller When setting up LUNs map each LUN to either two PIDs or two SIDs The hosts are in turn dual pathed to the same two switched fabrics When attaching the cables for a LUN mapped channel pair make sure that the first channel is connected to the upper port and the second channel is connected to the lower port of the second channel For example to provide redundancy map half of the LUNs across Channel 0 PID 40 and Channel 4 PID 42 and then map the other half of your LUNs across Channel 1 SID 41 and Channel 5 SID 43 a Point to point mode allows a maximum of 128 LUNs per array In a redundant configuration 32 LUNs are dual mapped across two channels on the primary controller and another 32 LUNs are dual mapped across the secondary controller for a total of 64 distinct LUNs a To use more than 64 LUNs you must change to Loop
180. iguration Service and CLI software in addition to saving your NVRAM controller configuration to disk The information saved this way can be used to rebuild all logical drives and therefore can be used to completely duplicate an array configuration to another array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for information about the save configuration and load configuration features Refer to the sccli man page or to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for information about the reset nvram and download controller configuration commands Using Software to Monitor and Manage the Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array This section describes the software management tools available for monitoring and managing the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC array with in band connections Note The Sun Storage CLI and the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software can also be accessed through the Ethernet port for out of band management of the array See Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 The following software management tools are provided on the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Professional Storage Manager CD provided with your array The Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Documentation CD provides the related user guides m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Provides centralized storage configuration maintenance and monitoring functions Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Fam
181. ily Configuration Service User s Guide for in band setup procedures a Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter Provides event monitoring and notification Refer to the Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter User s Guide for information m Sun StorEdge Command Line Interface CLI A command line interface utility that provides script based management Refer to the Sun StorEdge CLI User s Guide for CLI information For details on how to install Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter or the Sun StorEdge CLI software refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Manual The documentation CD for your array provides the related user guides with detailed installation and configuration procedures for Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 53 6 3 1 6 3 2 Other Supported Software Multipathing for the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays is provided by Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software Multipathing software is required when you have multiple connections from a server to an array directly or through a switch want to avoid a single point of failure and are setting up a configuration with redundant pathing Multipathing software makes multiple paths between the server and the storage system and provides full services on each path for path failover Refer to the appendix for your host and to the release notes for your array for
182. in the following sections Flash Selected Drive When you choose this menu option the read write LED of the drive you select flashes for a configurable period of time from 1 to 999 seconds Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 9 LED flashes Disk Disk 2 Disk 3 A Disk 4 Disk 7 Disk 10 D O Q D O al LI isk 5 Disk 8 B sk 11 Disk 6 Disk 9 Disk 12 O O O FIGURE 9 3 Flashing the Drive LED of a Selected Drive 9 4 2 Flash All SCSI Drives The Flash All SCSI Drives menu option flashes LEDs of all good drives but does not flash the LEDs of any defective drives In the illustration there are no defective drives Diskd J NDisk 4 Disk7 A RDisk 10 Disk 2 C isk 5 Disk 8 D skit Disk 3 Disk 6 Disk 9 Disk I 2 FIGURE 9 4 Flashing All Drive LEDs to Detect a Defective Non Flashing Drive 9 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 9 4 3 Flash All But Selected Drive With this menu option the read write LEDs of all connected drives except the selected drive flash for a configurable period of time from 1 to 999 seconds LED is not flashing FIGURE 9 5 Flashing All Drive LEDs Except a Selected Drive LED 9 5 Recovering From Fatal Drive Failure With a redundant RAID array system yo
183. inary to the controller In HyperTerminal go to the Transfer menu and choose Send file If you are not using HyperTerminal choose Upload or Send depending on the software When the firmware update is complete the controller automatically resets itself Install Firmware Binary Only Establish the serial port connection Choose System Functions Controller maintenance gt Download Firmware Set ZMODEM as the file transfer protocol of your emulation software Send the firmware binary to the controller In HyperTerminal choose Send file If you are not using HyperTerminal choose Upload or Send depending on the software When the firmware update is complete the controller automatically resets itself Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 25 8 6 5 Upgrading SES and PLD Firmware When you replace an I O controller the new controller might have a version of SES or PLD firmware different from the other controller in your array If this mismatch occurs when you install a controller you hear an audible alarm and see a blinking amber Event LED To synchronize the SES firmware and hardware PLD versions you need to download new SES firmware through Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software or the command line interface CLI If you have not installed this software you need to install it from the software CD that shipped with your array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide
184. information about which versions of Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software are supported on your platform For information about additional supported or provided software also refer to the release notes for your array Enabling VERITAS DMP To enable VERITAS Dynamic Multi Pathing DMP support on VERITAS Volume Manager in the Solaris operating environment perform the following steps Note To see instructions for enabling VERITAS DMP on other supported platforms refer to your VERITAS user documentation Configure at least two channels as host channels channels 1 and 3 by default and add additional host IDs if needed Connect host cables to the I O host ports configured in Step 1 Map each LUN to two host channels to provide dual pathed LUNs Add the correct string to vxddladm so VxVM can manage the LUNs as a multipathed JBOD vxddladm addjbod vid SUN pid StorEdge 3510 vxddladm listjbod VID PID Opcode Page Code Page Offset SNO length SEAGATE ALL PIDs 18 1 36 12 SUN StorEdge 3510 18 1 36 12 5 Reboot the hosts System reboot is required to implement these changes 6 54 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Note JBOD arrays require a license from VERITAS to enable any of its advanced features Refer to VERITAS Volume Manager Release Notes or contact VERITAS Software Corporation for licensing terms and information 6 3 3 The VE
185. ing Available Physical Drives on page 6 4 Determine whether sequential or random optimization is more appropriate for your applications and configure your array accordingly See Selecting Sequential or Random Optimization on page 6 11 Caution If you assign an IP address to an Use only the sequential cache optimization mode with the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 5 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Ze 10 11 12 Optional Configure host channels as drive channels See Configuring FC Channels as a Host or Drive Channel Optional on page 6 5 Confirm or change the Fibre Connection Option point to point or loop See Choosing Loop or Point to Point Fibre Connection on page 6 7 Revise or add host IDs on host channels See Editing and Creating Additional Host IDs Optional on page 6 8 The IDs assigned to controllers take effect only after the controller is reset Delete default logical drives and create new logical drives See Creating Logical Drives on page 6 21 Optional In dual controller configurations only assign logical drives to the secondary controller to load balance the two controllers See Changing a Logical Drive Controller Assignment Optional on page 6 28 Caution In single controller configurations do not disable the Redundant Controller setting and do not set the controller as a secondary contr
186. ing a Windows NT Server K 5 Note While your system is starting up you should see your new Fibre Channel devices You are now ready to partition and format your new devices 2 Open the Disk Administrator application a Click Start b Choose Administrative Tools from the Programs menu c Choose Disk Administrator A Disk Administrator is initializing progress indicator is displayed A Disk Administrator window then displays the drives recognized by the system 3 Select the disk whose free space you want to partition and format d Disk Administrator OF x Partition Tools View Options Help Disk 0 E D NTFS NTFS 8715 MB 2047 MB 6668 MB E Disk 1 Free Space 100MB ROMBA A Primary partition a Choose Create from the Partition menu A Create Primary Partition dialog box enables you to specify the size of the partition b Specify a size or accept the default c Click OK to create the partition The partition is now identified as Unformatted in the Disk Administrator window K 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4 Select the Unformatted partition a Disk Administrator Oy x Partition Tools View Options Help Disk 0 C D NTFS NTFS 8715 MB 2047 MB 6668 MB Disk 1 100 MB oO Primary partition map g Choose Commit Changes Now from the Partition menu A confi
187. ion Def lt 32 gt Peripheral Device Type Parameters Host Cylinder Head Sector Mappin Sector Ranges Variable Head Ranges Variable s Variable Conf igurat ion A confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Choose Yes to confirm 3 Choose Cylinder Ranges Variable lt 65536 Cylinders lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view Maximum Queued I O Count 1024 view LUNs per Host SCSI ID 32 view Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connection 1624 view Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def lt 32 gt Peripheral Device Type Parameters Host Cylinder Head Sector Mappi Configuration Sector Ranges 255 Sectors Head Ranges 64 Heads Driv EMMONS ETT roe Ute et Redunda Variable Control lt 1624 Cylinders lt 32768 Cylinders lt 65536 Cylinders A confirmation dialog is displayed 4 Choose Yes to confirm Refer to Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information about firmware commands used with logical drives 6 18 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 1 11 Deleting Logical Drives To assign a different RAID level or a different set of drives to a logical drive you must unmap and delete the logical drive and then create a new logical drive Deleting logical drives is an optional operation when configuring a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array However wi
188. ion This process results in the loss of any data that resides on the partition J 7 Creating a Volume Group The volume group contains the physical resources that you can use to create usable storage resources for your applications Appendix J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment J 7 1 Create a directory for the volume group and a device file for the group in that directory mkdir dev vgmynewvg mknod dev vgmynewvg group c 64 0x060000 The name of the directory is the name of the volume group By default HP UX uses names of the format vgNN but you can choose any name that is unique within the list of volume groups In the preceding example the mknod command has the following arguments The fully qualified path name of the new device file group The letter c indicates a character device file The major number 64 used for all volume groups A minor number of the form 0xNN0000 where NN is the two digit hexadecimal representation of the volume group number 06 in the example To associate the physical volume with a volume group use the vgcreate command vgcreate dev vgmynewvg dev dsk c12t6d2 J 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 To verify the creation and view the volume group properties use the vgdisplay command vgdisplay vg02 Volumegroups VG Name dev vg02 VG Write Access read write VG Status
189. ion Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut tre reproduite sous aucune forme par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l autorisation pr alable et crite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence s il y ena Le logiciel d tenu par des tiers et quicomprend la technologie relative aux polices de caract res est prot g par un copyright et licenci par des fournisseurs de Sun Des parties de ce produit pourront tre d riv es des syst mes Berkeley BSD licenci s par l Universit de Californie UNIX est une marque d pos e aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays et licenci e exclusivement par X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems le logo Sun Sun StorEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com SunSolve Sun Fire Sun Enterprise et Solaris sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques d pos es de Sun Microsystems Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE EN L TAT ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE YCOMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE A L APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L ABSENCE DE CONTREFA ON OS mom Ca Adobe PostScript 1 Contents Product and Architecture Overview 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Comparison of Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Arrays 1 2 1 1 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array
190. ion view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters s v View vj Set Trigger Thresholds for 3 3U Events Defi Trigger Thresholds for 5U Events Adju Trigger Thresholds for 12U Events Trigger Thresholds for CPU Temperature Events F Trigger Thresholds for Board Temperature Events U Voltage and Temperature Parameters 3 Repeat Step 2 as many times as necessary to display the threshold ranges and triggering events lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices v v Trigger Thresholds for 3 3U Events T T Upper Threshold for 3 3U Event Default 3 6U gt n Lower Threshold for 3 3U Event Default 2 9U gt U J Voltage and Temperature Parameters lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit view and edit view and edit view and edit view and edit Voltage Range from 3 4U to 3 9U Default Trigger Event default Disable Trigger Event disable Threshold default Input Voltage Trigger T T Upper Threshold for 3 3U Event Default lt 3 6U
191. ired on which you want to mount the new file system Note If the mount point directory does not exist it is created When the file system is created a status screen displays Command OK the Journaled File System the mount point and the size of the file system I 8 l 8 Mounting the New File System Return to the File Systems screen Choose List All File Systems from the File Systems menu to see the names of all file systems Identify the name of the file system you created in the Name column for example ldev 1v00 Choose Mount a File System from the File Systems menu to display the Mount a File System screen Type the name of the file system you identified in Step 3 next to FILE SYSTEM name Type the name of the mount point you specified next to DIRECTORY over which to mount When the file system is mounted a status screen displays Command OK Exit SMIT Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 I 9 Verifying That the New File System Is Mounted 1 Use the mount command to verify that the logical volume is mounted correctly mount The mounted file systems and directories are displayed 2 Examine the list to make sure your new file system is mounted at the mount point you specified 3 Display the attributes of the new file system df k mount point 10 Determining the World Wide Name
192. is RESET Prior to resetting the controller operation may not proceed normally Do you want to reset the controller now 4 Choose Yes to reset the controller 6 1 5 Editing and Creating Additional Host IDs Optional All RAID arrays are preconfigured when they arrive from the factory Default host channel IDs are displayed in TABLE 6 1 6 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 6 1 Default Host Channel IDs Channel Primary Controller ID Secondary Controller ID PID SID ChannelO 40 N A Channell N A 42 Channel4 44 N A Channel5 N A 46 The number of host IDs depends on the configuration mode In point to point mode only one ID should be assigned to each channel m In loop mode up to 16 IDs can be assigned to each Fibre Channel not to exceed a maximum of 32 IDs per array Typically host IDs are distributed between the primary and secondary controllers to load balance the I O in the most effective manner for the network Each ID must be a unique number within the host channel You can m Edit each host ID number to change the target number of each controller host channel that is seen by the host m Add additional host ID numbers for loop configurations Note To map 1024 partitions in loop mode you must add additional host IDs so that 32 IDs are mapped to the array s channels Several configurations are possible such as eight IDs mapped to each of the f
193. ithin the cable length limitations Ensure that the operating environment for the array does not exceed the specifications Use two people to lift the array to avoid injury The array can weigh over 60 pounds Do not place the array in a vertical position Place the array horizontally If you are installing more than one array you can stack up to five arrays on top of each other Do not stack more than five arrays together Provide two separate power sources for the array These power sources must be independent of each other and each must be controlled by a separate circuit breaker at the power distribution point 2 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 2 7 Console and Other Requirements A console with at least one serial port connection is necessary for installation and configuration of your Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array Once you have configured your array with an IP address an Ethernet port can also be useful for configuring the array Refer to the following preinstallation worksheet for additional preparation details 2 8 Preinstallation Worksheet Before ordering a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array complete the preinstallation worksheet and then prepare the site for installation according to the site planning requirements Note If you are connecting to several hosts or fabric switches make as many copies of TABLE 2 5 as you need and label them appropri
194. l 1D Size cne gt Speed L _DRu Status vendor and Product ID 34732 200MB Gl ON LINE SEAGATE S1336753FSUN36G eee View drive information ON LINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G Scan scsi drive set slot Number 1 ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G add drive Entr identity sceiasive TT EnS 1 ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G d flash All drives TAND BY SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G flash Selected drive flash all But selected drive SES SUN StorEdge 351 F A The option to change the Flash Drive Time is displayed 4 Optional Type a Flash Drive Time from 1 to 999 seconds and press Return A confirmation message is displayed 5 Choose Yes to confirm ID Size lt MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID rs se a a RE VEPA ELEI ON LINE SEAGATE T336 753FSUN36G View drive information la ON LINE SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G Scan set E SEAGATE 1336753FSUN36G add Flash Drive Time lt Second gt 15 d Flash All Drives flash All drives TAND flash Selected drive Yes 16F A flash all But selected drive A The read write LED of a failed hard drive does not flash The absence of a flashing LED helps you locate and remove the failed drive In addition to flashing all drives you can flash the read write LED of only a selected drive or flash the LEDs of all drives except the selected drive using steps similar to those outlined These three drive flashing menu options are described
195. lass options Replace command line variables f You must be superuser to do this with real names or values To delete a file type rm filename The settings on your browser might differ from these settings Preface xxi Related Documentation Title Part Number Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array with SATA Release Notes 817 6597 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual 3510 3511 816 7325 Sun StorEdge 3000 RAID Firmware 3 25 and 3 27 User s Guide 817 3711 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 1 5 User s Guide 817 3337 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Diagnostic Reporter 1 5 User s Guide 817 3338 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Manual 1 5 1 6 817 3764 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 1 6 User s Guide 817 4951 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Rack Installation Guide for 2U Arrays 817 3629 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide 816 7326 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Safety Regulatory and Compliance Manual 816 7930 Accessing Sun Documentation All Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array documentation is available online in both PDF and HTML format at the following locations http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3511 or http docs sun com db coll 3511FCarray You can view print or purchase a broad selection of Sun documentation at http www sun com documentation You can order printed copies of manuals for the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array at http co
196. lation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 4 Each disk drive is slot independent meaning that once a logical drive has been initialized the system can be shut down and the drives can be removed and replaced in any order In addition disk drives are field upgradeable to larger drives without interruption of service to user applications The drive firmware is also field upgradeable but the firmware upgrade procedure requires interruption of service In the event of a single disk drive failure with the exception of RAID 0 the system continues to service all I O requests Either mirrored data or parity data is used to rebuild data from the failed drive to a spare drive assuming one is assigned If a spare is not assigned you have to manually rebuild the array In the unlikely event that multiple drive failures occur within the same logical drive data that has not been replicated or backed up might be lost This is an inherent limitation of all RAID subsystems and could affect application programs An air management sled FRU is available for use when you remove a disk drive and do not replace it Insert an air management sled into the empty slot to maintain optimum airflow through the chassis Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Disk Drives The drives can be ordered in 36 GB 73 GB and 146 GB sizes Thirty six gigabyte drives have a rotation speed of 15 000 RPM while 73 GB drives and 146 GB drives have a rotatio
197. le HBA controller module No No No Resolved Resolved Resolved Yes Yes Yes End Check event Power off Yes gt messages in Replace 1 O controller Place known good I O firmware or software module m gt controller module in slot messages Power on Yes No Message Resolved Resolved Yes gt End Controller has failed is displayed No Yes v Replace chassis End No Pull battery module and m gt Replace battery reseat it Notes Fibre Channel arrays use small form factor No SFP connectors to attach the array to hosts and expansion units Each Fibre Channel I O controller module has six SFP ports These Resolved ve ports are labeled FCO through FC5 S Replace battery module if it is close to the 2 year life limit Yes Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly End Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FIGURE 9 9 I O Controller Module Flowchart FRU from the same array Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 25 9 26 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX A Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Specifications This appendix provides the specifications for the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays The topics covered are a Physical Specifications on page A 2 m Sun StorEdge 351
198. lity Availability and Serviceability 5 2 Contents v 5 1 2 Dual Controller Considerations 5 2 5 1 3 Single Controller Considerations 5 4 5 1 4 Write Back and Write Through Cache Options 5 5 5 2 Software Management Tools 5 5 5 2 1 Out of Band Connection 5 5 5 2 2 In Band Connection 5 6 5 3 Summary of Array Configuration 5 6 5 3 1 Point to Point Configuration Guidelines 5 9 5 3 2 A SAN Point to Point Configuration Example 5 10 5 3 3 A DAS Loop Configuration Example 5 16 5 3 4 Connecting Two Hosts to One Host Channel Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array only 5 20 5 4 Larger Configurations 5 21 6 First Time Configuration 6 1 6 1 Initial Configuration Steps 6 2 6 1 1 Viewing the Initial Firmware Window 6 2 6 1 2 Checking Available Physical Drives 6 4 6 1 3 Configuring FC Channels as a Host or Drive Channel Optional 6 5 6 1 4 Choosing Loop or Point to Point Fibre Connection 6 7 6 1 5 Editing and Creating Additional Host IDs Optional 6 8 6 1 6 Selecting Sequential or Random Optimization 6 11 6 1 7 Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity for Random and Sequential Optimization 6 12 6 1 7 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 6 13 6 1 7 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 6 13 6 1 8 Reviewing Default Logical Drives and RAID Levels 6 14 6 1 8 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Default Configurations 6 15 vi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 2 6 3 6 1 8 2 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Arr
199. lization in progress is displayed in the upper left corner of the window The following message appears when the initialization is completed LG ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status O HLN SB FL NAME Press Escape to dismiss the notification The newly created logical drive is displayed in the status window Changing a Logical Drive Controller Assignment Optional By default logical drives are automatically assigned to the primary controller If you assign half of the logical drives to the secondary controller the maximum speed and performance is somewhat improved due to the redistribution of the traffic 6 28 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 To balance the workload between both controllers you can distribute your logical drives between the primary controller displayed as the Primary ID or PID and the secondary controller displayed as the Secondary ID or SID Caution In single controller configurations do not disable the Redundant Controller Function and do not set the controller as a secondary controller The primary controller controls all firmware operations and must be the assignment of the single controller In a single controller configuration if you disable the Redundant Controller Function and reconfigure the controller with the Autoconfigure option or as a secondary controller the controller module becomes inoperable an
200. ll six host channels as well as to both drive channels see FIGURE 4 11 and FIGURE 4 12 Host port FCO Drive port FC2 Host port FC4 Host port FC1 Drive port FC3 Host port FC5 FIGURE 4 11 Default Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array SFP Placement Host port FCO Drive port FC2 Host port FC4 Host port FC1 Drive port FC3 FIGURE 4 12 Default Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array SFP Placement In the default single controller array SFPs are initially plugged into FCO FC1 FC4 FCS No SFPs are plugged into the drive channels This configuration is appropriate for connecting to up to four hosts or fibre switches with no connection to expansion units see FIGURE 4 13 and FIGURE 4 14 4 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 L LINK S SPEED 40 100 LINK ON 268 ON NO LINK OFF 1GB OFF _ _ O ws ae T FC CONNECTOR LEDS FC2 TOP SLOT FC3 BOTTOM SLOT i FC2 on FCS pinty W ae CACHE fe oS pRive__ o e O O9 LOOP S ACTIVITY E S L Host port FCO Host port FC1 Host port FC4 Host port FC5 FIGURE 4 13 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Default Single Controller SFP Placement 10 100 HARGI
201. lumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit vent logs A log of recent events is displayed Event Logs 6181 Controller Initialization Completed 7 13 29 46 2002 0181 Controller Initialization Completed un Apr 7 13 29 49 2662 2181 LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization A 7 14 07 33 2002 2102 LG Logical Drive ALERT Initialization Failed un Apr 7 14 68 59 2002 i 2181 LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization un Apr 7 14 69 19 2002 P 2182 Initialization of Logical Drive Completed un Apr 7 14 19 42 2002 i 2181 LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization un Apr 7 14 23 56 2002 P 2182 Initialization of Logical Drive Completed un Apr 7 14 34 27 2002 i4 Note The controller can store up to 1000 event log entries The event log records configuration and operational events as well as error messages and alarm events 2 Use your arrow keys to move up and down through the list Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 19 3 To clear events from the log after you have read them use your arrow keys to move down to the last event you want to clear and press Return A Clear Above xx Event Logs confirmation message is displayed Event Logs 21811 a Logi
202. ly be connected with Sun StorEdge 3511 FC expansion units The two models of arrays and expansion units cannot be mixed Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for additional cabling diagrams Note Large configurations may require the use of one or more optional extended length cables part number X9732A Other items may also be required Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide for information about supported cables SFPs and other user replaceable items Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 25 4 11 Setting Loop IDs on Expansion Units When an expansion unit is attached to a RAID array unique hard assigned loop IDs are assigned to each expansion unit drive A loop ID is the decimal version of an arbitrated loop physical address AL_PA The lowest number loop ID is the lowest priority address on the loop On the left front side of an expansion unit an ID switch is used to set the loop IDs for the disk drives to a different range of values so that the same IDs are not repeated by RAID units and expansion units on the same loop Setting the loop ID on an array or expansion unit requires dropping the front bezel out of the way and removing the small vertical plastic cap on the left side of the bezel that covers the left rackmount tab Rackmount tabs are also referred to as ears Plastic ear cap covering loop ID switch Bezel locks FIGURE 4 20 Front Bezel a
203. map 32 partitions of LG1 0 31 5 N A 51 LG1 to CH5 Perform the following steps which are described in more detail later in this manual to set up a typical point to point SAN configuration based on FIGURE 5 1 and FIGURE 5 2 Check the position of installed SFPs Move them as necessary to support the connections needed Connect expansion units if needed Create at least two logical drives logical drive 0 and logical drive 1 and configure spare drives Leave half of the logical drives assigned to the primary controller default assignment Assign the other half of the logical drives to the secondary controller to load balance the I O Create up to 32 partitions LUNs in each logical drive Change the Fibre Connection Option to Point to point only view and edit Configuration parameters Host side SCSI Parameters Fibre Connections Option For ease of use in configuring LUNs change the host IDs on the four channels to be the following assignments Channel 0 PID 40 assigned to the primary controller Channel 1 PID 41 assigned to the primary controller Channel 4 SID 50 assigned to the secondary controller Channel 5 SID 51 assigned to the secondary controller Caution Do not use the command Loop preferred otherwise point to point This command is reserved for special use and should be used only if directed by technical support Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 15
204. mory NVRAM RS 232 port chip and 10 100 BASE T Ethernet chip The RAID I O controller module is a multifunction board I O controller modules include Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP ports the SES logic and the RAID controller The SES logic monitors various temperature thresholds fan speed from each fan voltage status from each power supply and the FRU ID Each RAID I O controller module incorporates SES direct attached Fibre Channel capability to monitor and maintain enclosure environmental information The SES controller chip monitors all internal 12 and 5 voltages various temperature sensors located throughout the chassis and each fan The SES also controls the front and back panel LEDs and the audible alarm Both the RAID chassis and the expansion chassis support dual SES failover capabilities for fully redundant event monitoring 122 I O Expansion Modules The hot serviceable I O expansion modules provide four Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or eight Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array SFP ports but do not have battery modules or controllers I O expansion modules are used with I O Controller Modules in non redundant Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays and in expansion units and JBODs 1 2 3 Disk Drives Each disk drive is mounted in its own sled assembly Each sled assembly has EMI shielding an insertion and locking mechanism and a compression spring for maximum shock and vibration protection 1 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Instal
205. mple Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 29 3510 Disk Array is installed with 1024MBytes SDRAM Total SCSI channels 6 SCSI channel 0 is a host channel id 40 SCSI channel 1 is a host channel id 41 SCSI channel 2 is a drive channel id 14 15 SCSI channel 3 is a drive channel id 14 15 SCSI channel 4 is a host channel id 70 SCSI channel 5 is a host channel id 71 Scanning SCSI channels Please wait a few moments Preparing to restore saved persistent reservations Type skip to skip Do not use the skip option shown at the bottom of the example This option is reserved for support personnel performing testing 4 14 Power Off Procedure You might need to power off the array both power supplies if you relocate the array or perform certain maintenance procedures with associated servers Always shut down the array s controller before powering off the array Caution If controllers are not shut down from the firmware application or the CLI before an array is powered off data that is written to cache and that has not been completely written to the disks will be lost To power off an array perform the following steps Stop all T O activity to the array Shut down the controller with one of the following commands a Firmware application Shutdown Controller command system Functions gt Shutdown controller a Sun Storage CLI shut down controller
206. muting alarms 8 4 beeper 8 4 N name controller 6 30 NEW DRV drive status 8 9 null modem cable 4 19 null modem serial cable 4 19 number of host IDs supported loop mode 6 8 point to point mode 6 8 NVRAM restoring 8 20 O operating environments supported 1 8 optimization random I O maximum size 6 12 sequential I O maximum size 6 12 out of band connection 5 5 out of band connections 5 5 out of band management 4 21 Index 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 P package contents 3 3 checking 3 3 parameters serial port 4 19 physical drive size and speed 8 8 status 8 8 physical drive capacity setting 6 25 planning site 2 1 ports connecting see cabling 4 1 power and fan module description 1 8 power LED 7 3 power outlets connecting to AC 4 7 connecting to DC 4 8 power specifications 2 4 powering up an array 4 10 Powering Up and Checking LEDs 4 10 power off procedure 4 30 power on sequence 4 29 preinstallation worksheet 2 7 preparing for logical drives larger than 253 Gbyte 6 17 probe scsi all command 6 35 Product and Architecture Overview 1 1 protocols Fibre Channel 1 9 Q quick installation not applicable 8 2 R rack mounting an array cabinet mounting an array 3 5 RAID 1 0 concurrent rebuild in 9 7 RAID 5 0 6 16 RAID level assignment 6 24 RAID levels defined 6 15 selected 6 23 RAID levels defined 6 15 ra
207. mware Window on page 6 2 Checking Available Physical Drives on page 6 4 Configuring FC Channels as a Host or Drive Channel Optional on page 6 5 Choosing Loop or Point to Point Fibre Connection on page 6 7 Editing and Creating Additional Host IDs Optional on page 6 8 Selecting Sequential or Random Optimization on page 6 11 Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity for Random and Sequential Optimization on page 6 12 Reviewing Default Logical Drives and RAID Levels on page 6 14 Completing Basic Configuration on page 6 16 Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte on page 6 17 Deleting Logical Drives on page 6 19 Creating Logical Drives on page 6 21 Changing a Logical Drive Controller Assignment Optional on page 6 28 Creating or Changing a Logical Drive Name Optional on page 6 30 Partitioning a Logical Drive Optional on page 6 31 m Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to Host LUNs on page 6 35 Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only on page 6 37 Using the Map Host LUN Option on page 6 37 Setting Up Host Filter Entries on page 6 42 Creating Device Files for the Solaris Operating Environment on page 6 51 Saving Configuration NVRAM to a Disk on page 6 52 m Using Software to Monitor and Manage the Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel Array on page 6 53 Other Supported Software on pa
208. n Operation and Service Manual May 2004 5 3 1 Point to Point Configuration Guidelines Remember the following guidelines when implementing point to point configurations in your array and connecting to fabric switches m The default mode is Loop only You must change the Fibre Channel Connection mode to Point to point only with the firmware application see Choosing Loop or Point to Point Fibre Connection on page 6 7 Caution If you keep the default loop mode and connect to a fabric switch the array automatically shifts to public loop mode As a result communication between the array and the switched fabric runs in half duplex send or receive instead of providing the full duplex send and receive performance of point to point mode m Check the host IDs on all the channels to ensure that there is only one ID per channel on the primary controller or on the secondary controller for point to point mode When viewing the host IDs there should be one primary controller ID PID or one secondary controller ID SID the alternate port ID should display N A Proper point to point mode allows only one ID per channel m On the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array if one of the dual ports of channel 0 is connected to a switch port FCO the other FCO port on that controller and the two FCO ports on a redundant controller cannot be used Similarly if one of the channel 1 ports is connected with a switch port FC1 the oth
209. n Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 4 4 8 4 4 1 8 4 4 2 Controller Voltage Temperature Status View Controller Voltage and Temperature Status Perform the following steps to check the controller voltage and temperature Choose view and edit Peripheral devices Controller Peripheral Device Configuration View Peripheral Device Status Components with voltage and temperatures monitoring are displayed and identified as normal or out of order lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns ITEM VALUE STATUS w an EIET 3 3U 3 384U Operation Normally 5U 5 153U Operation Normally 12U 12 442U Operation Normally Def i CPU Temperature 37 5 C Temperature within Safe Range Adju Boardi Temperature 40 5 C Temperature within Safe Range PCont Board2 Temperature 51 0 lt C Temperature within Safe Range F View Peripheral Device Status Voltage and Temperature Parameters Press Escape to exit the Status window Configure a Trigger Threshold Perform the following steps to change a voltage or temperature trigger threshold Choose view and edit Peripheral devices Controller Peripheral Device Configuration Voltage and Temperature Parameters Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 13 2 Select a threshold you want to view or edit and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installat
210. n only use the capacity of each drive up to the maximum capacity of the smallest drive 7 Optional Add a local spare drive from the list of unused physical drives Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 25 Note A global spare cannot be created while creating a logical drive The spare chosen here is a local spare and automatically replaces any failed disk drive in this logical drive The local spare is not available for any other logical drive a Optional Choose Assign Spare Drives Maximum Drive Capacity 34476MB Disk Reserved Space 256 MB Logical Drive Assignments A list of available physical drives is displayed b Highlight a physical drive and press Return to select it 1p sizectm gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID 266MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336 753FSUN36G NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE T336753FSUN36G Note A logical drive created in NRAID or RAID 0 which have no data redundancy or parity does not support spare drive rebuilding c Press Escape to return to the menu of logical drive options 8 Optional For dual controller configurations only assign this logical drive to the secondary controller By default all logical drives are assigned to the primary controller Caution Do not assign logical drives to secondary controller in single controller arrays Only the primary controller works in a single controlle
211. n page 9 3 a Automatic Logical Drive Rebuild on page 9 3 a Manual Rebuild on page 9 6 a Concurrent Rebuild in RAID 1 0 on page 9 7 Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement on page 9 8 a Flash Selected Drive on page 9 9 a Flash All SCSI Drives on page 9 10 a Flash All But Selected Drive on page 9 11 Recovering From Fatal Drive Failure on page 9 11 Using the Reset Push Button on page 9 13 Silencing Audible Alarms on page 9 13 Modifying Drive Side SCSI Parameters on page 9 13 Troubleshooting Flowcharts on page 9 14 Power Supply and Fan Module on page 9 14 Drive LEDs on page 9 17 Front Panel LEDs on page 9 19 I O Controller Module on page 9 24 For more troubleshooting tips refer to the release notes for your array at http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3510 or http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3511 9 1 9 1 RAID LUNs Not Visible to the Host Caution When mapping partitions to LUN IDs there must be a LUN 0 Otherwise none of the LUNs will be visible By default all RAID arrays are preconfigured with one or two logical drives For a logical drive to be visible to the host server its partitions must be mapped to host LUNs For mapping details refer to Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to Host LUNs
212. n speed of 10 000 RPM Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Disk Drives The disk drives incorporate Serial ATA SATA technology They are optimized for capacity but have performance levels approaching Fibre Channel performance levels The drives are 250 GB drives and have a rotation speed of 7200 RPM Battery Module The battery module is designed to provide power to system cache for 72 hours in the event of a power failure When power is reapplied the cache is purged to disk The battery module is a hot swappable FRU that is mounted on the I O board with guide rails and a transition board It also contains the EIA 232 and DB9 serial interface COM ports Chapter 1 Product and Architecture Overview 1 7 1 2 5 Power and Fan Modules Note The Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array can only be ordered in an AC configuration However DC power supplies can be ordered in an x option kit and the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array s can be reconfigured using the DC power supplies Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide Each array contains redundant two power and fan modules Each module contains a 420 watt power supply and two radial 52 cubic feet per minute CFM fans Power module autoranging capabilities range a AC Power Supply From 90 Volts Alternating Current VAC to 264 VAC a DC Power Supply From 36 Volts Direct Current VDC to 72 VDC A single power and fan module can sustain an array 1 3 Interoperability Th
213. nd Front Bezel Locks of an Array 1 Use the provided key to unlock both bezel locks 2 Grasp the front bezel cover on both sides and pull it forward and then down 3 Remove the plastic cap from the left ear of the array a Squeeze both sides of the cap at the top and the bottom b Turn the cap toward the center of the array until it disengages and pull it free Caution To avoid damage to the cap do not pull the cap forward directly or pull from only its top or bottom The ID switch is exposed when you remove the plastic cap 4 26 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Press to change the ID number FIGURE 4 21 ID Switch Located on the Left Front Side of Arrays and Expansion Units Press the upper or lower switch button to change the ID number so that each connected RAID array and expansion unit uses a different loop ID Note By default the ID switch on all RAID arrays and expansion units is set to 0 where the range of drive IDs is automatically 0 to 11 for 12 drives the IDs 12 to 15 are ignored Caution Ensure that the loop IDs of expansion units do not duplicate the loop IDs of other connected expansion units or RAID arrays The ID switch offers eight ID ranges Each range contains 16 IDs the last four IDs in each range are ignored These ranges are shown in TABLE 4 5 TABLE 4 5 ID Switch Settings for Expansion Units ID Switch Setting Range of ID
214. ndom I O optimization maximum size 6 12 RARP 4 20 Rear Panel LEDs 7 4 rebuild automatic 9 3 concurrent in RAID 1 0 9 7 manual 9 6 Rebuilding Logical Drives 9 3 Recovering From Fatal Drive Failure 9 11 redundant controller explained 9 2 release notes 1 13 remote file F 3 requirements environmental 2 3 Reset button 8 5 reset button silencing failed component alarms 8 4 Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From a File 8 20 RS 232 connecting to 4 19 G 2 J 3 upgrading firmware via 8 24 S safety precautions 2 2 SB MISS drive status 8 9 SCSI channel status 8 10 SCSI drive global or local spare 8 9 STANDBY mode 8 9 USED DRV mode 8 9 vendor ID 8 9 SCSI drive status 8 8 sequential I O optimization maximum size 6 12 serial cable null modem 4 19 serial port parameters 4 19 Index 5 serial port connection F 1 G 2 J 2 K 2 serial port parameters F 2 G 3 H 2 I 2 I 4 J 2 J 5 SES version conflict 7 4 Setting Loop IDs on Expansion Units 4 26 B 6 settings records to keep D 1 SFP connectors 4 28 inserting in ports 4 18 B 10 silencing alarms 8 4 site planning 2 1 console requirement 2 7 customer obligations 2 2 electrical power 2 4 EMC 2 3 environmental 2 3 layout 2 5 physical 2 5 safety precautions 2 2 site preparation survey 2 7 size of drive 8 8 software accessing the array 5 5 software tools 1 13 Solaris reset baud rate F 3 spare local for logical drive 6 2
215. ndows NT Server to Recognize New Devices and LUNs on page K 5 m Determining the World Wide Name for Windows NT Servers on page K 9 K 1 Setting Up the Serial Port Connection The RAID controller can be configured by means of a host system running a VT100 terminal emulation program or by a Microsoft Windows terminal emulation program such as Hyperterminal Note You can also monitor and configure a RAID array over an IP network with the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program after you assign an IP address to the array For details see Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 and refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide Use a null modem serial cable to connect the COM port of the RAID array to an unused serial port on your host system Note A DB9 to DB25 serial cable adapter is included in your package contents to connect the serial cable to a DB25 serial port on your host if you do not have a DB9 serial port Power up the array On the server choose Start Programs Accessories Hyperterminal gt HyperTerminal Type a name and choose an icon for the connection K 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 5 In the Connect To window select the COM port that is connected to the array from the Connect using drop down menu Connect To A 2x Enter details for the
216. ne rename the hardwire term as ss3000 and replace 9600 with 38400 The edited line looks like the following line ss3000 dv dev term b br 38400 el el C S Q U D ie 0e D Save the edited file in the etc directory You can now use the tip command with the ss3000 argument tip ss3000 Once you have edited and saved etc remote you can also use the tip command with the hardwire argument tip hardwire Appendix F Configuring a Sun Server Running the Solaris Operating Environment F 3 F 4 Using the tip Command for Local Access to the Array You can access the RAID COM port DB9 connector on the controller module locally with the following steps Connect the RAID array COM port to the serial port of a Solaris workstation as shown in FIGURE F 1 Use the tip command to access the array locally tip 38400 dev ttyn where n is the COM port identifier For instance if you have connected the array to the COM port identified as ttyb use this command tip 38400 dev ttyb Refresh your screen by holding down the Control key on your keyboard and pressing the letter L key on your keyboard Fo F 4 Determining the WWN in the Solaris Operating Environment 1 If you have a new HBA device installed on your computer reboot the computer 2 Type the following the command luxadm probe Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service M
217. nfiguration 6 39 5 Select a logical drive LD The partition table is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN LU LD DRU Partition Size lt MB gt RAID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes LG ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status O HLN SB FL NAME eecuce cece 6 Select a partition A menu displays Map Host LUN and Create Host Filter Entry lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes Map Host LUN CHL ID 46 Primary Control Create Host Filter Entry CHL 1 ID 42 lt Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Control CHL 5 ID 46 lt Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Name List ecuccece 7 Choose Map Host LUN _ B J NI reate Hos ilter Entry A dialog displays your configured host LUN mapping 6 40 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 8 Choose Yes to confirm the host LUN mapping Logical Drive Partition Channel ID Lun The partition is now mapped to a LUN lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives LUN ESAR kaid E Size lt MB gt CHL ID 46 Primary Control CHL 1 ID 42 lt Secondary Contr CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Control view and edit logical Volumes 26006 RAI Di m CHL 5 ID 46 lt Secondary Contr Edit Host ID WWN Name List ecu
218. nformation that was on the failed disk However the NVRAM configuration file that was present on the disk is not re created After the rebuild process is complete restore your configuration as described in Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 8 20 Automatic Logical Drive Rebuild Rebuild with Spare When a member drive in a logical drive fails the controller first determines whether there is a local spare drive assigned to the logical drive If there is a local spare drive the controller automatically starts to rebuild the data from the failed drive to the spare Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 3 If there is no local spare drive available the controller searches for a global spare drive If there is a global spare the controller automatically uses the global spare to rebuild the logical drive Failed Drive Swap Detect If neither a local spare drive nor a global spare drive is available and the Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time is disabled the controller does not attempt to rebuild unless you apply a forced manual rebuild To enable the Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time feature perform the following steps 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time A list of check time intervals is displayed 2 Select a Periodic Auto Detect Failure
219. ng yde ashing Are all the LEDs off during operation Is the power cord ell seated Is the power switch on Is the power Yes connected Yes Yes Yes Resolved Yes No No No v Y Y Turn it on Connect it Seat it Is the LED ribbon cable on the right ear loose Secure the ribbon cable Notes y Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Continue with 3B Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Replace chassis Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array FIGURE 9 5 Front Panel LEDs FC Flowchart 1 of 4 9 20 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 3B Front panel LEDs problem FC Are both power switches on Yes Is the power connected No No h d y Turn them Connect on them Front Is either panel fan power cooling 3 LED Yes FRU LED Yes Replace FRU amber amber No End No Is the LED ribbon cable on Yes Secure the the right ear ribbon cable loose No v Replace chassis End End FIGURE 9 6 Front Panel LEDs Flowchart 2 of 4 Yes Are the power cords well seated Seat them No Is the LED ribbon cable on the right ear loose
220. ng and operating the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array with SATA hereafter referred to as Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array for ease of reading This guide is written for experienced system administrators who are familiar with Sun Microsystems hardware and software products Caution Read the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Safety Regulatory and Compliance Manual before beginning any procedure in this manual How This Book Is Organized This book covers the following topics Chapter 1 provides an overview of the array s features Chapter 2 covers site planning and basic safety requirements Chapter 3 provides general procedures for unpacking and inspecting the array Chapter 4 provides procedures for connecting your array to power and to the network Chapter 5 provides an overview of the array configuration Chapter 6 provides procedures for initially configuring your array Chapter 7 describes the array s front and back panel LEDs Chapter 8 describes maintenance procedures xix Chapter 9 describes troubleshooting procedures Appendix A provides the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC array specifications Appendix B provides information about standalone JBOD arrays Appendix C provides information about failed component alarm codes Appendix D provides tables for recording configuration data Appendix E provides pinout identification for each connector Appendix F provides instructions on configu
221. ng the array The system documentation also tells you what device file to use to access that port Then set the serial port parameters on the server See Configuring a COM Port to Connect to a RAID Array on page 4 19 for the parameters to use Note The next section also shows how to use the Kermit utility to set these parameters Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From an IBM Server Running AIX The RAID controller can be configured from the host system by means of terminal emulators such as Kermit Note You can also monitor and configure a RAID array over an IP network with the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program after you assign an IP address to the array For details see Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 and refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide To access the controller firmware through the serial port perform the following steps Connect the serial null modem cable to the disk array and to the serial port on the IBM server Note A DB9 to DB25 serial cable adapter is shipped with the disk array to connect the serial cable to a DB25 serial port on your host if you do not have a DB9 serial port FIGURE I 1 RAID Array COM Port Connected Locally to the Serial Port of a Host System Power on the array Aft
222. ning Your Array This chapter covers the following maintenance and troubleshooting topics Quick Installation Reserved on page 8 2 Battery Operation on page 8 2 Silencing Audible Alarms on page 8 4 Checking Status Windows on page 8 6 Logical Drive Status Table on page 8 6 Physical Drive Status Table on page 8 8 Channel Status Table on page 8 10 Controller Voltage Temperature Status on page 8 13 Viewing SES Status on page 8 15 SES Temperature Sensor Locations on page 8 16 Identifying Fans on page 8 17 Viewing Event Logs on the Screen on page 8 18 Restoring Your Configuration NVRAM From Disk on page 8 20 Upgrading Firmware on page 8 22 Patch Downloads on page 8 23 Installing Firmware Upgrades on page 8 23 Controller Firmware Upgrade Features on page 8 24 Installing Controller Firmware Upgrades From the Firmware Application Windows Only on page 8 25 Upgrading SES and PLD Firmware on page 8 26 Replacing the Front Bezel and Ear Caps on page 8 26 8 1 Quick Installation Reserved This menu option is not used in normal operation It is reserved for special use in special situations and only when directed by technical support Caution Do not use this menu option unless directed by technical support Using this menu option will result in the loss of your existing configuration and all data
223. ns are rotating at 4000 RPM or higher Faulty Failed One or both fans are rotating at less than 4000 RPM Temp Thermometer icon Monitors the temperature level and indicates violations of the internal temperature threshold of 55C Solid green Solid amber Good Under temperature threshold Failed Over temperature threshold Chapter 7 Checking LEDs 7 3 TABLE 7 2 Front Panel LEDs Continued LED LED Color Description Event Caution icon Indicates any abnormal or failure Solid green Normal operation of I O board event in the I O board Solid amber Failed I O board Blinking amber Indicates that the version of the SES firmware or associated hardware PLD code on one controller does not match that on the other controller Faal Note To test that the LEDs work using a paperclip press and hold the Reset button for 5 seconds All the LEDs should change from green to amber when you perform this test Any LED that fails to light indicates a problem with the LED When you release the Reset button the LEDs return to their initial state Correcting SES or PLD Firmware Version Conflicts When you replace an I O controller the new controller might have a version of SES or PLD firmware different from the other controller in your array If this mismatch occurs when you install a controller you hear an audible alarm and see a blinking amber Event LED See Upgrading SES and PLD Firmware on page 8 26 f
224. nt option which should not be used for this product Caution Do not use the command Loop preferred otherwise point to point This command is reserved for special use and should be used only if directed by technical support Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 19 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 5 3 4 Set up to eight IDs on each channel if needed see TABLE 5 3 TABLE 5 3 Example Primary and Secondary ID Numbers in a Loop Configuration With Two IDs per Channel Channel Primary Secondary Number ID Number ID Number 0 40 41 1 43 42 4 44 45 5 47 46 Map logical drive 0 to channels 0 and 5 of the primary controller Map logical drive 1 to channels 1 and 4 of the secondary controller Map logical drive 2 to channels 0 and 5 of the primary controller Map logical drive 3 to channels 1 and 4 of the secondary controller Connect the first server to port FCO of the upper controller and port FC5 of the lower controller Connect the second server to port FC4 of the upper controller and port FC1 of the lower controller Connect the third server to port FC5 of the upper controller and port FCO of the lower controller Connect the fourth server to port FC1 of the upper controller and port FC4 of the lower controller Install and enable multipathing software on each connected server Connecting Two Hosts to One Host Channel Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array only Except in some clustering config
225. nt or a controller event and which application you are using silence the alarm as specified in the following table TABLE 8 2 Silencing the Alarm Cause of Alarm To Silence Alarm Failed Component Alarms Use a paperclip to push the Reset button on the right ear of the array Controller Event Alarms In the Firmware Application From the Main Menu choose system Functions gt Mute beeper Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 3 27 User s Guide fore more information In Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Refer to Updating the Configuration in the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 1 3 User s Guide for information about the Mute beeper command In the CLI Run mute controller Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 1 6 User s Guide for more information Note Pushing the Reset button has no effect on controller event alarms and muting the beeper has no effect on failed component alarms Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 5 8 4 Checking Status Windows The status windows used to monitor and manage the array are described in the following sections Logical Drive Status Table on page 8 6 Physical Drive Status Table on page 8 8 Channel Status Table on page 8 10 Controller Voltage Temperature Status on page 8 13 Viewing SES Status on page 8 15 SES Temperature Sensor Locations on page 8 16 Identifying Fans on page 8 17
226. ntinued data stored in the cache memory is not lost Battery modules can support cache memory for 72 hours Write cache is not automatically disabled when the battery is offline due to battery failure or a disconnected battery You can enable or disable the write back cache capabilities of the RAID controller To ensure data integrity you can choose to disable the Write Back cache option and switch to the Write Through cache option through the firmware application by choosing view and edit Configuration parameters gt Caching Parameters 3 2 EPA Software Management Tools You can manage your array through an out of band or in band connection Out of Band Connection With the out of band serial port connection you can use a Solaris tip session or a Microsoft Windows terminal emulation program to access the firmware application For details see Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page F 1 With the out of band Ethernet port connection you can use the telnet command to access the firmware application For details see Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 You can also configure an array over the Ethernet connection with the CLI and the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service software Caution If you assign an IP address to an array to manage it out of band for security reasons it is advisable to put the IP address on a private network rather than a publicly routable network
227. oller The primary controller controls all firmware operations and must be the assignment of the single controller If you disable the Redundant Controller Function and reconfigure the controller with the Autoconfigure option or as a secondary controller the controller module becomes inoperable and will need to be replaced Note While the ability to create and manage logical volumes remains a feature of arrays for legacy reasons the size and performance of physical and logical drives have made the use of logical volumes obsolete Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Avoid using logical volumes and use logical drives instead For more information about logical drives refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Optional Partition the logical drives See Partitioning a Logical Drive Optional on page 6 31 Map each logical drive partition to an ID on a host channel or apply a host LUN filter to the logical drives See Mapping Logical Drive Partitions to Host LUNs on page 6 35 for more information Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 7 Note Each operating environment or operating system has a method for recognizing storage devices and LUNs and might require the use of specific commands or the modification of specific files Be sure to check the information for your operating environment to ensure
228. om its counterpart while gaining access to all the signal paths The surviving controller then manages the ensuing event notifications and takes over all processes It is always the primary controller regardless of its original status and any replacement controller afterward assumes the role of the secondary controller The failover and failback processes are completely transparent to the host Controllers are hot swappable if you are using a redundant configuration and replacing a failed unit takes only a few minutes Since the I O connections are on the controllers you might experience some unavailability between the times when the failed controller is removed and a new one is installed in its place To maintain your redundant controller configuration replace the failed controller as soon as possible For details refer to Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide 2a 9 3 1 Rebuilding Logical Drives This section describes automatic and manual procedures for rebuilding logical drives The time required to rebuild a logical drive is determined by the size of the logical drive the I O that is being processed by the controller and the array s Rebuild Priority With no I O being processed time required to build a 2 terabyte RAID 5 logical drive is a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 4 5 hours m Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 6 5 hours Note As disks fail and are replaced the rebuild process regenerates the data and parity i
229. omputer Use your host system disk management utilities to prepare the disks in the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array for use Refer to your host system documentation for more information about disk management utilities available to you B 8 Enabling Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array Support For Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays configure JBOD support only when you have a JBOD array connected directly to a host This enables you to monitor peripheral device conditions and events If you have an expansion unit connected to a RAID array the RAID controllers monitor the expansion unit s conditions and events for you Note Enabling JBOD support can impact I O performance To monitor peripheral device conditions and events on a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array from the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service console you first need to enable JBOD support Choose View Agent Options Management The Agent Options Management window is displayed Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 11 2 Select the Enable JBOD Support checkbox 3 To immediately display the JBOD array in the main window you need to probe for new inventory Choose View View Server and click Probe 4 Click OK The JBOD array is displayed in the main window In a single bus configuration both ports of the JBOD array are connected to one HBA on the server as shown in the following example Sun T
230. on K 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Windows NT Server K 5 Enabling a Windows NT Server to Recognize New Devices and LUNs K 5 Determining the World Wide Name for Windows NT Servers K 9 xii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 FIGURE 1 1 FIGURE 4 1 FIGURE 4 2 FIGURE 4 3 FIGURE 4 4 FIGURE 4 5 FIGURE 4 6 FIGURE 4 7 FIGURE 4 8 FIGURE 4 9 FIGURE 4 10 FIGURE 4 11 FIGURE 4 12 FIGURE 4 13 FIGURE 4 14 FIGURE 4 15 FIGURE 4 16 FIGURE 4 17 FIGURE 4 18 Figures Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Front View 1 2 Front Bezel and Front Bezel Locks of an Array 4 2 Sequence of Steps to Change Front Bezel Locks So Keys Cannot Be Removed 4 3 Hardware Connections on the Back of a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 4 5 Hardware Connections on the Back of a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 6 Installing a Cord Lock 4 8 Front Panel of the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array With LEDs Displayed 4 10 Dedicated Drive Channels 2 on the Upper Controller and 3 on the Lower Controller in a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 4 12 Dedicated Drive Channels 2 and 3 on Both Controllers in a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 13 Host Channels on a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array 4 14 Host Channels on a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array 4 15 Default Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array SFP Placement
231. on page 6 35 Ensure that you have completed this task To make the mapped LUNs visible to a specific host perform any steps required for your operating system or environment For host specific information about different operating environments and operating systems see m Configuring a Sun Server Running the Solaris Operating Environment on page F 1 m Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server on page G 1 m Configuring a Linux Server on page H 1 Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment on page I 1 m Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment on page J 1 Configuring a Windows NT Server on page K 1 9 2 Controller Failover Controller failure symptoms are as follows m The surviving controller sounds an audible alarm a The RAID Controller Status LED on the failed controller is amber m The surviving controller sends event messages announcing the controller failure of the other controller A Redundant Controller Failure Detected alert message is displayed and written to the event log If one controller in the redundant controller configuration fails the surviving controller takes over for the failed controller until it is replaced 9 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 A failed controller is managed by the surviving controller which disables and disconnects fr
232. only mode add host IDs to one or more channels and add 32 LUNs for each additional host ID Note When in loop mode and connected to a fabric switch each host ID is displayed as a loop device on the switch so that if all 16 IDs are active on a given channel the array looks like a loop with 16 nodes attached to a single switch FL port In public loop mode the array can have a maximum of 1024 LUNs where 512 LUNs are dual mapped across two channels primary and secondary controller respectively A SAN Point to Point Configuration Example A point to point configuration has the following characteristics m In SAN configurations the switches communicate with the Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel array host ports using a fabric point to point F_port mode 5 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 m When you use fabric point to point F_port connections between a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array and fabric switches the maximum number of LUNs is limited to 128 LUNs for a nonredundant configuration and is limited to 64 LUNs for a redundant configuration a Fibre Channel standards allow only one ID per port when operating point to point protocols resulting in a maximum of four IDs with a maximum of 32 LUNs for each ID and a combined maximum of 128 LUNs a The working maximum number of LUNs is actually 64 LUNs in a configuration where you configure each LUN on two different channels for
233. onnector types Cable distance from the array to the host s Operating environment Patches installed IP addresses e Network e Host or switch Host or Fabric Switch Connectivity Host or Fabric Switch 2 Host or fabric switch name Host or fabric switch make model HBA connector types Cable distance from the array to the host s Operating environment Patches installed IP addresses e Network e Host or switch Chapter 2 Site Planning 2 9 2 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER O Unpacking Your FC Array This chapter describes the procedure for unpacking your Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array package The following topics are covered in this chapter Opening Your Package on page 3 2 Checking the Package Contents on page 3 3 Customer Provided Cables on page 3 5 Mounting Your Array in a Rack or Cabinet on page 3 5 Converting a JBOD to a RAID Array on page 3 6 3 1 3 1 3 2 Opening Your Package Follow these guidelines for unpacking the equipment Caution To avoid personal injury or damage to the equipment during installation always use two people to remove the unit from its container This unit weighs approximately 60 pounds Select a suitable area for unpacking Store all packing material and boxes for possible equipment returns Check the
234. ontroller module and on two channels The cables from the two ports mapped to each logical drive must be cabled to two separate switches See FIGURE 5 1 and FIGURE 5 2 for examples of this configuration The following figures show the channel numbers 0 1 4 and 5 of each host port and the host ID for each channel N A means that the port does not have a second ID assignment The primary controller is the top I O controller module and the secondary controller is the bottom I O controller module The dashed lines between two ports indicate a port bypass circuit that functions as a mini hub and has the following advantages Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 11 a The port bypass circuit on each channel connects the upper and lower ports on the same channel and provides access to both controllers at the same time a If there are two host connections to the upper and lower ports on Channel 0 and one host connection is removed the other host connection remains operational Therefore if you have a redundant multipathing configuration in which you have two host connections to each logical drive and one connection fails the remaining path maintains a connection to the logical drive In FIGURE 5 1 and FIGURE 5 2 with multipathing software to reroute the data paths each logical drive remains fully operational when the following conditions occur m One switch fails or is disconnected and the logical drive is routed to the second switch
235. oose Programs Accessories Command Prompt G 3 Enabling a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server to Recognize New Devices and LUNs Before beginning this procedure make sure that you are using a supported FC host bus adapter HBA such as a QLogic QLA2310 or QLogic QLA2342 Refer to the release notes for your array for current information about which HBAs are supported Also make sure that you are using a supported driver for your HBA For the QLA2310 or QLA2342 use driver version 8 1 5 13 or later Note When the Microsoft Windows operating system recognizes the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array s SCSI Enclosure Services SES processor and identifies it as a SE3510 or SE3511 SCSI Enclosure it might prompt you to supply a driver This is standard plug and play behavior when unknown devices are encountered but no device driver is necessary If you see this prompt simply click Cancel If you have multiple arrays you might see this prompt more than once Each time you see this prompt click Cancel Appendix G Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server G 5 1 Boot your system and verify that the HBA basic input output system BIOS recognizes your new FC device Note While your system is starting up you should see your new Fibre Channel devices 2 If a Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed click Cancel You are now ready to partition and format your new devices
236. option or as a secondary controller the controller module becomes inoperable and will need to be replaced The Redundant Controller setting view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry must remain enabled for single controller configurations This preserves the default primary controller assignment of the single controller In a single controller configuration disable the Write Back Cache feature to avoid the possibility of data corruption in the event of a controller failure This will have a negative effect on performance To avoid either issue use dual controllers Using two single controllers in a clustering environment with host based mirroring provides some of the advantages of using a dual controller However you still need to disable the Write Back Cache in case one of the single controllers fails and you want to avoid the risk of data corruption For this reason a dual controller configuration is preferable Note For a single controller configuration the controller status shows scanning which indicates that the firmware is scanning for primary and secondary controller status and redundancy is enabled even though it is not used There is no performance impact 5 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 5 1 4 Write Back and Write Through Cache Options Unfinished writes are cached in memory in write back mode If power to the array is disco
237. or information about upgrading SES and PLD firmware 7 3 Back Panel LEDs The back panel LED colors indicate the conditions described in the following figures and tables Note Although an amber light on the back panel often indicates a faulty component a steady amber light on the Ethernet link LED indicates normal Ethernet activity See TABLE 7 3 for more information 7 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 7 3 1 I O Controller Module LEDs FIGURE 7 3 shows the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array I O controller module and the LEDs on its back panel FIGURE 7 4 shows the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array I O controller module and the LEDs on its back panel Ethernet active Ethernet link Battery L LINK S SPEED LINK ON 2GB ON FC CONNECTOR LEDS FC2 TOP SLOT FC3 BOTTOM SLOT CLEAN 23h i DAA or O O OQ H 5 L S o DRIVE 9 ie S___ACTIWTY SFP speed SFP link status RAID controller status I O activity Cache FIGURE 7 3 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array I O Controller Module and Battery Module LEDs I O Activity Cache Ethernet active Ethernet link Battery 1GB 2GB 2 GB ONLY gt DRIVE YRCC_ FCOQ OFCOO OFCIO OFCIO Ores Ore D jt S E S E S S Resi E Ree S SF
238. ou define which serial ports to use baud rate hand shake settings and flow control 5 Set serial port parameters on the server Set serial port parameters to m 38 400 baud m 8 bit m 1 stop bit No parity a At the configuration screen use the arrow keys to highlight Serial Port Settings and press Return b If A is not correct press the letter A and the cursor goes to line A H 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 c Backspace and edit to select the correct serial port dev ttyS x where x is the proper serial port connecting the server to the array After you edit the line press Return and the cursor goes back to the line Change which Settings d If E is not correct press the letter E and the cursor goes to line E Backspace and change the line to 38400 8N1 After you edit the line press Return and the cursor goes back to the line Change which Settings e Set F to no When pressing F toggle from yes to no f Set G to no When pressing G toggle from yes to no g Press the Escape key to return to the configuration screen h In the configuration menu use the arrow keys to highlight Save setup as dfl and press Return A configuration saved confirmation message is displayed i Highlight Exit from Minicom in the configuration menu and press Return H 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Linux Server After you have s
239. our host channels or sixteen IDs mapped to two channels and none to the other two For more information see Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only on page 6 37 To add a unique host ID number to a host channel perform the following steps Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 9 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Scsi channels lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes if Chl Mode Gn ee bef ia s Term CurS ynC1k Curtlid A Host Serial F _NAJ 1 Host NA 42 AUTO Serial F NA 2 3 C gt DRU RCC 14 15 AUTO Serial F NA 2 GHz Serial 3 25 C gt DRU RCC 14 15 AUTO Serial F NA 2 GHz Serial 4 Host 44 NA AUTO Serial F NA 5 Host NA 46 AUTO Serial F NA 2 Select the host channel whose Primary Secondary ID you want to edit and press Return 3 Choose view and edit scsi Id If host IDs have already been configured on the host channel they will be displayed If no host IDs have been configured a dialog is displayed that says No SCSI ID Assignment Add Channel SCSI ID 4 If a host ID has already been assigned to that channel select an ID and press Return to view a menu for adding or deleting SCSI IDs Then select Add Channel SCSI ID If no host ID has been assigned to the channel choose Yes to add an ID Primary Controller and Secondary Controller are displayed in a m
240. out silencing audible alarms 9 8 Modifying Drive Side SCSI Parameters There are a number of interrelated drive side SCSI parameters you can set using the view and edit Configuration parameters menu option It is possible to encounter undesirable results if you experiment with these parameters so it is good practice to only change parameters when you have good reason to do so Refer to the Viewing Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 13 and Editing Configuration Parameters chapter of the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for cautions about particular parameter settings that should be avoided In particular do not set the Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time to less than one second and do not set the SCSI I O Timeout to anything less than 15 seconds and preferably no less than the Fibre Channel default of 30 seconds 29 9 9 1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts This section provides troubleshooting flowcharts to illustrate common troubleshooting methods The flowcharts included in this section are m Power Supply and Fan Module on page 9 14 a Drive LEDs on page 9 17 m Front Panel LEDs on page 9 19 a I O Controller Module on page 9 24 For the JBOD and expansion unit flowchart refer to Troubleshooting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays on page B 14 For overview information about LEDs see Chapter 7 For information about replacing modules re
241. pacity configurations The maximum number of expansions units attached to a RAID array are m up to eight expansion units attached to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array m up to five expansion units attached to a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array These configurations are described in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for your array The examples in FIGURE 4 18 and FIGURE 4 19 show RAID arrays connected to two expansion units Connections to expansion units are designed to keep all A drive ports on the same loop and all B drive ports on the same loop Caution To avoid drive assignment conflicts make sure that each connected array and expansion unit uses a different loop ID as described in Setting Loop IDs on Expansion Units on page 4 26 In the RAID array two of the unused SFP host ports could be used to provide redundant pathing to the two servers and the remaining unused SFP host ports could be connected to two more servers in a redundant configuration Similarly you can connect expansion units to other channels which are separate from channels 2 and 3 if you configure them as drive channels For details refer to Configuring FC Channels as a Host or Drive Channel Optional on page 6 5 4 22 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 RAID array
242. phone number that you want to dial Country region United States of America 1 Area code 760 Phone number Connect using 7 Cancel 6 Click OK 7 In the Properties window set the serial port parameters using the drop down menus m 38 400 baud a 8 data bits m 1 stop bit a No parity Appendix K Configuring a Windows NT Server K 3 COM1 Properties H 21 x Port Settings Bits per second as Data bits fe M Parity Noe S Stop bits i w Flow control Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 8 Click OK 9 To save the connection and its settings choose File Save The connection file name is connection name where connection name is the name you gave this HyperTerminal connection in Step 4 10 To make a connection shortcut on your desktop choose Start gt Find For Files or Folders Enter the connection name and click the Search Now button Highlight and right click on the file name in the Search Results window choose Create Shortcut and click Yes You are now ready to configure your array K 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 K 2 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Windows NT Server To access the array from a Windows NT server through a serial port use the HyperTerminal connection you configured in Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page K 2 or install a VT100 terminal emulation program and use
243. pply conductors to power distribution boxes for both the rack mounted array and the desktop array must be enclosed in a metal conduit or raceway when specified by local national or other applicable government codes and regulations The supply conductors and power distribution boxes or equivalent metal enclosure must be grounded at both ends Chapter 2 Site Planning 2 3 m The supplied arrays require voltages within minimum fluctuation m The facilities voltage supplied by the customer must maintain a voltage with not more than 5 percent fluctuation The customer facilities must provide suitable surge protection 2 4 Electrical and Power Specifications Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays require two independent power sources Each array has two power supply and fan modules for redundancy Each AC array requires two 115 VAC 15A or two 240 VAC service outlets All AC power supplies are autoranging and are automatically configured to a range of 90 264 VAC and 47 63 Hz There is no need to make special adjustments Each DC array requires two 48 VDC service outlets and has an input voltage range of 36 VDC to 72 VDC Note To ensure power redundancy be sure to connect the two array power modules to two separate circuits for example one commercial circuit and one UPS TABLE 2 2 Power Specifications AC power Voltage and frequency 90 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz Input current 5A max Power supply output volta
244. pter 5 Configuration Overview 5 13 Server 0 PID 40 A PID 43 C N A G N A H N A A N A C SID 45 G SID 46 H Map LGO to PIDs 40 and 43 Map LG1 to SIDs 45 and 46 N Host port on channel number N PID 40 PID43 Host IDs on primary controller SID 45 SID46 Host IDs on secondary controller N A Not applicable no ID on that controller Port bypass circuit FIGURE 5 2 A Point to Point Configuration With a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array and Two Switches Note These illustrations show the default controller locations however the primary controller and secondary controller locations can occur in either slot and depend on controller resets and controller replacement operations TABLE 5 1 summarizes the primary and secondary host IDs assigned to logical drives 0 and 1 based on FIGURE 5 1 and FIGURE 5 2 5 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 5 1 Example Point to Point Configuration With Two Logical Drives in a Dual Controller Array Logical LUN Channel Primary ID Secondary ID Task Drive IDs Number Number Number Map 32 partitions of LG0 to CHO LGO 0 31 0 40 N A Duplicate map 32 partitions of LG 0 0 31 1 41 N A LGO to CH1 Map 32 partitions of LG1 to CH4 LG 1 0 31 4 N A 50 Duplicate
245. ptional You can divide a logical drive into several partitions or use the entire logical drive as a single partition You can configure up to 128 partitions on each logical drive For guidelines for setting up 1024 LUNs see Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only on page 6 37 Caution If you modify the size of a partition or logical drive you lose all data on the drive Note If you plan to map hundreds of LUNs the process is easier if you use the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program Partition O 2 GB Partition 1 1GB Logical drive 0 RAID 5 8 GB a oe Partition 2 5 GB Partition O 2 5 GB Logical drive 1 a Partition 1 5 GB RAID 3 6 GB Partition 2 2 GB FIGURE 6 4 Partitions in Logical Drives To partition a logical drive perform the following steps Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 31 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs 2 Select the logical drive you want to partition and press Return 3 Choose Partition logical drive LU RAID Size lt MB gt NAME PO 28E4A83F NA RAIDI e
246. r SAM HP UX s system administration tool If SAM is not installed on your system or if you prefer to use the command line interface the following procedures guide you through the task For more information please consult the HP document Configuring HP UX for Peripherals Use the ioscan command to determine what addresses are available on the HBA to which you will be attaching the array Access the firmware application on the array and set the SCSI IDs of the host channels you will be using Map the partitions containing storage that you want to use to the appropriate host channels Partitions must be assigned to LUNs in sequential order beginning at LUN 0 Halt the operating system using the shutdown command Turn off all power to peripheral devices and then to the server Attach one or more host channels of the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array to the SCSI interface cards in the host using the supplied SCSI cables Turn on the power to the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array and all other peripheral devices After they are initialized power on the server and boot HP UX During the boot process the operating system recognizes the new disk devices and builds device files for them Verify that you can see the new storage resources by running the ioscan command You are now ready to use the storage Note If you create and map new partitions to the array you can have them recognized by the op
247. r array 6 26 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 a Choose Logical Drive Assignments A confirmation message is displayed Redundant Controller Logical Drive Assign to Secondary Controller Yes No If you use two controllers for a redundant configuration a logical drive can be assigned to either of the controllers to balance the workload Logical drive assignments can be changed later but that operation requires a controller reset to take effect b Choose Yes to assign the logical drive to the redundant controller The menu of logical drive options is displayed 9 Press the Escape key A confirmation window is displayed Raid Level RAID 5 Online SCSI Drives 3 Maximum Drive Capacity 34476 MB Disk Reserved Space 256 MB Spare SCSI Drives z 1 Logical Drive Assignment Primary Controller Create Logical Drive res No 10 Verify all information in the window and if it is correct choose Yes A message indicates that the logical drive initialization has begun 11 Press Escape to close the drive initialization message A progress bar displays the progress of initialization as it occurs Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 27 6 1 13 12 Note You can press the Escape key to remove the initialization progress bar and continue working with menu options to create additional logical drives The percentage of completion for each initia
248. rEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com SunSolve Sun Fire Sun Enterprise and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and in other countries U S Government Rights Commercial use Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems Inc standard license agreement and applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Copyright 2004 Dot Hill Systems Corporation 6305 El Camino Real Carlsbad Californie 92009 Etats Unis Tous droits r serv s Sun Microsystems Inc et Dot Hill Systems Corporation peuvent avoir les droits de propri t intellectuels relatants a la technologie incorpor e dans le produit qui est d crit dans ce document En particulier et sans la limitation ces droits de propri t intellectuels peuvent inclure un ou plus des brevets am ricains num r s a http www sun com patents et un ou les brevets plus suppl mentaires ou les applications de brevet en attente dans les Etats Unis et dans les autres pays Ce produit ou document est prot g par un copyright et distribu avec des licences qui en restreignent l utilisation la copie la distribution et la d compilat
249. rage 3 Scan the card to look for devices attached to it usually with the Scan Fibre Devices or the Fibre Disk Utility The node name or similar label is the WWN The following example shows the node name for a Qlogic card G 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 ID Vendor Product Rev Node Name Port ID 0 Qlogic QLA22xx Adapter B 210000E08B02DE2F 0000EF See Setting Up Host Filter Entries on page 6 42 for more information about creating host filters Appendix G Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server G 11 G 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 APPENDIX H Configuring a Linux Server This appendix provides access information and LUN setup information needed when you connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array to a server running the Linux operating environment For a list of supported adapters refer to the release notes for your array This information supplements the configuration steps presented in this manual and covers the following topics Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page H 1 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Linux Server on page H 3 Checking the Adapter BIOS on page H 4 Multiple LUN Linux Configuration on page H 5 Making an ext3 File System for Linux on page H 6 Creating a File System on page H 7 Creating a Mount Point and
250. range The LUN mask is also defined with a filter type as read only or read write Firmware Redundant Loops The selection of drive side dual loop is fixed Since two channels are used to connect a group of physical drives the two channels automatically assume the same ID address and operate in duplex mode A 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 A 2 5 Firmware Dynamic Load Balancing The controller provides a mechanism to equally distribute I O loads between channels in a redundant loop configuration A 3 Agency Approvals and Standards Product Safety Standard Country U S Canada Germany European Union Japan Australia Argentina Germany Russia Russia Electromagnetic Compatibility UL Listed to UL60950 2000 3rd Edition CSA Standard CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 3rd Edition T V EN 60950 2000 Part of World wide CB Scheme Part of World wide CB Scheme Resolution 92 98 S Mark GS mark ergonomics Rheinland Part of World wide CB Scheme GOST R mark Hygienic Mark ergonomics Standard Country U S Canada Japan European Union Australia New Zealand Taiwan Russia Germany Argentina FCC 47 Part 15 Subpart B Class B ICES 003 VCCI Class B EN 55022 1998 Class B AS NZS 3548 1996 BSMI CNS 13438 Class B GOST R mark Same as European Union S mark Appendix A Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Specifications A 5
251. re make sure that the version of firmware you want to use is supported by your array Refer to the release notes for your array for Sun Microsystems patches containing firmware upgrades that are available for your array See SunSolve Online for subsequent patches containing firmware upgrades If you are downloading a Sun patch that includes a firmware upgrade the Readme file associated with that patch tells you which Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays support that firmware release To download new versions of controller firmware or SES and PLD firmware use one of the following tools m Sun StorEdge CLI with an in band connection for Linux and Microsoft Windows hosts and for servers running the Solaris operating environment m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program with an in band connection for Solaris and Microsoft Windows hosts m Firmware application only for downloading controller firmware from a Microsoft Windows host with an out of band serial port connection Caution You should not use both in band and out of band connections at the same time to manage the array You might cause conflicts between multiple operations Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 23 8 6 3 Note Disk drive firmware is provided through Sun disk firmware patches which include the required download utility Sun disk firmware patches are separate from the Sun StorEdge 3000 family firmware patches Do not use the CLI or Sun StorEdge
252. redundancy and to avoid a single point of failure In a dual controller array one controller automatically takes over all operation of a second failed controller in all circumstances However when an I O controller module needs to be replaced and a cable to an I O port is removed the I O path is broken unless multipathing software has established a separate path from the host to the operational controller Supporting hot swap servicing of a failed controller requires the use of multipathing software such as Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software on the connected servers Note Multipathing for Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays is provided by Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software Refer to the release notes for your array for information about which versions of Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software are supported on which platforms Important rules to remember are m A single logical drive can be mapped to only one controller either the primary controller or the secondary controller Ina point to point configuration only one host ID per channel is allowed The host ID can be assigned to the primary controller and be a PID or it can be assigned to the secondary controller and be a SID a If you have two switches and set up multipathing to keep all logical drive connections operational for any switch failure or the removal of any I O controller module ensure that each logical drive is mapped to two ports one on each I O c
253. ress Return If you only have one interface it is already highlighted press Return Highlight Configuration Setting and press Return Highlight Host Adapter Settings and press Return Move down to Host Adapter BIOS and make sure it is enabled if not press the Return key and it toggles from disabled to enabled The setting should be enabled H 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 10 11 12 13 14 15 Press Escape and go back to Configuration Settings Highlight Selectable Boot Settings and press Return This is where you can make the interface bootable or not bootable Highlight Select Boot Device Press the Return key to toggle from disabled to enabled m Select Disabled if this is not going to be a bootable device m Select Enabled if this is going to be bootable device Press Escape until you get back to Configuration Settings Highlight Extended Firmware Settings and press Return On the Extended Firmware Settings menu highlight Connection Option and press Return A screen lists three types of connection 0 Loop only for connecting to loop type devices 1 Point to point only for connecting to fabric switches 2 Loop preferred otherwise point to point If you are connecting to a loop device highlight 0 and press Return If you are connecting to a fabric device or switch highlight 1 and press Return Press
254. riginally directed to the failed channel on its pair of controllers Moreover application failover software should be running on the host computer to control the transfer of I O from one HBA to another in case either data path fails 1 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 1 6 Additional Software Tools The following additional software tools are available on the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Professional Storage Manager CD provided with your array m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service a management and monitoring program m Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter software a monitoring utility m Sun StorEdge CLI a command line utility to monitor and manage the array Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide for information about installing these tools Array related user guides with configuration procedures for these tools are provided on m Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array The Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Documentation CD m Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array The Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Documentation CD For other supported software tools refer to the release notes at the following locations m http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3510 or m http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3511 Chapter 1 Product and Architecture Overview 1 13 1 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Ins
255. ring a Solaris server Appendix G provides instructions on configuring a Windows 2000 or Windows 2000 Advanced server Appendix H provides instructions on configuring a Linux server Appendix I provides instructions on configuring a IBM AIX server Appendix J provides instructions on configuring an HP UX server Appendix K provides instructions on configuring a Windows NT server Using UNIX Commands This document might not contain information on basic UNIX commands and procedures such as shutting down the system booting the system and configuring devices See the following for this information a Software documentation that you received with your system a Solaris operating environment documentation which is at http docs sun com xx Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Shell Prompts Shell Prompt C shell machine name C shell superuser machine name Bourne shell and Korn shell Bourne shell and Korn shell superuser Typographic Conventions Typeface Meaning Examples AaBbCc123 The names of commands files Edit your login login file and directories on screen Use 1s a to list all files computer output You have mail AaBbCc123 What you type when contrasted su with on screen computer output password AaBbCc123 Book titles new words or terms Read Chapter 6 in the User s Guide words to be emphasized These are called c
256. rive status The logical drive is now initializing The logical drive was improperly created or modified For example the logical drive was created with Optimization for Sequential I O but the current setting is Optimization for Random I O The logical drive is in good condition A drive member failed in the logical drive More than one drive member in a logical drive has failed The logical drive is rebuilding One of the disk drives cannot be detected Two or more member disk drives in this logical drive have failed Indicates the performance optimization set when the logical drive was initialized This cannot be changed after the logical drive is created S Optimization for Sequential I O R Optimization for Random I O Total number of drive members in this logical drive Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 7 8 4 2 TABLE 8 3 Parameters Displayed in the Logical Drive Status Window Continued Parameter Description SB Number of standby drives available for the logical drive This includes local spare and global spare drives available for the logical drive FL Number of failed drive members in the logical drive Name Logical drive name user configurable To handle failed incomplete or fatal failure status see Identifying a Failed Drive for Replacement on page 9 8 and Recovering From Fatal Drive Failure on page 9 11 Physical Drive Status Table To check and configure physic
257. rmation dialog box is displayed 6 Click Yes to save the changes you have made A dialog box confirms that disks were updated successfully Click OK The partition is now identified as Unknown in the Disk Administrator window 8 Format the Unknown partition d Disk Administrator OF x Partition Tools Yiew Options Help EJS si E Disk 0 C D NTFS NTFS 8715 MB 2047 MB 6668 MB Disk 1 100 MB BBE Primary partition Partition MO0MB Unknown Appendix K Configuring a Windows NT Server K 7 a Select the Unknown partition b Choose Format from the Tools menu A Format dialog box is displayed c Choose NTFS from the File System drop down menu d Make sure the Quick Format checkbox is selected e When you have specified the settings you want click Start A dialog box warns you that any existing data on the disk will be erased f Click OK to format the disk The new partition is formatted and a dialog box confirms that the format is complete 9 Click OK The formatted partition is identified as NTFS in the Disk Administrator window d Disk Administrator OF Xx Partition Tools View Options Help gE E Disk 0 D NTFS NTFS 8715 MB 2047 MB 6668 MB Disk 1 F NTFS 100 MB 100 MB oO Primary partition Partition 100MB NTFS F 10 Repeat these steps for any other new partitions and devices you want to format K 8 Sun StorE
258. rollers e Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 JBOD Expansion Unit 1 e Contents Sheet for your array e Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Quick Installation Guide To download and print the latest release notes go to one of the following locations http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3510 or http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3511 2 CDs in a CD set one CD for software and one CD for user documentation 1 Serial null modem cable lor2 25 foot 7 5m CAT5 Ethernet cable one per controller 1 Cable adapter DB9 to DB25 2 DC power cables if you ordered a DC powered array 2 AC cord locks in a plastic bag if you ordered an AC powered array 1 AC cable country kit if the array is AC powered 2 Front bezel keys in a plastic bag to secure the front bezel onto the chassis Various Purchased options These options are ordered at the time of purchase and are integrated into or added to the unit prior to delivery Chapter 3 Unpacking Your FC Array 3 3 S22 Field Replaceable Units Check that you received all field replaceable units FRUs ordered with your Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array For additional FRUs consult your sales representative For instructions on how to install or replace FRUS review the following manuals located on the product web site or on your documentation CD m Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Rack Installation Guide for 2U Arrays m Sun S
259. ror conditions and controller events are reported by event messages and event logs Component failures are also indicated by LED activity on the array Note It is important to know the cause of the error condition because how you silence the alarm depends on the cause of the alarm To silence the alarm perform the following steps 1 Check the error messages event logs and LED activity to determine the cause of the alarm Component event messages include but are not limited to the following SES PLD firmware mismatch Temperature Cooling element Power supply Battery Fan Voltage sensor Caution Be particularly careful to observe and rectify a temperature failure alarm If you detect this alarm shut down the controller Shut down the server as well if it is actively performing I O operations to the affected array Otherwise system damage and data loss can occur See Failed Component Alarm Codes on page C 1 for more information about component alarms Controller event messages include but are not limited to the following Controller Memory Parity Drive SCSI Channel Logical drive Loop connection Refer to the Event Messages appendix in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information about controller events 8 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 2 Depending on whether the cause of the alarm is a failed compone
260. rppub iuniverse com marketplace sun xxii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual e May 2004 Contacting Sun Technical Support For late breaking news and troubleshooting tips review the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Release Notes located at http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network_Storage_Solutions Workgroup 3511 If you have technical questions about this product that are not answered in the documentation go to http www sun com service contacting To initiate or check on a USA only service request contact Sun support at 800 USA 4SUN To obtain international technical support contact the sales office of each country at http www sun com service contacting sales html 508 Accessibility Features The Sun StorEdge documentation is available in 508 compliant HTML files that can be used with assistive technology programs for visually impaired personnel These files are provided on the Documentation CD for your product as well as on the websites identified in the previous Accessing Sun Documentation section Additionally the software and firmware applications provide keyboard navigation and shortcuts which are documented in the user s guides Preface xxiii Sun Welcomes Your Comments Sun is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions You can submit your comments by going to http www sun com hwdocs feedback Please
261. rray with one expansion unit is a high capacity configuration Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays typically allow the connection of up to two expansion units to support a maximum of 36 disks However you can create larger configurations that support as many as eight expansion units and up to 108 disks if you use the guidelines in this section You can also create larger configurations of Sun StorEdge 3511 FC arrays that support from one to five expansion units and up to 72 disks Carefully consider the following limitations of special high capacity configurations Using multiple Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel arrays connected to the same SAN normally provides significantly better performance than one high capacity configuration m Random optimization should not be used with high capacity configurations and it should never be used with the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array Use the default sequential optimization instead Random cache optimization greatly reduces the maximum number of supported disks a Only cabling configurations described in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual are supported when configuring a high capacity Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array m Maximize the size of each logical drive up to 1908 Gbyte before creating another logical drive in order to allow for maximum storage capacity m Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays can only be connected with Sun StorEdge 3510 FC expansion units Similarly Sun StorEdge 3511 FC arrays can on
262. s 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs A list of available channels and their associated controllers is displayed 2 Select a channel and host ID and press Return lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes CHL ID 46 Primary Controller CHL 1 ID 42 lt Secondary Controller CHL 4 ID 44 Primary Controller gt CHL 5 ID 46 lt Secondary Controller Edit Host ID WWN Name List eeunecece 6 44 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 3 If the Logical Drive and Logical Volume menu options are displayed choose Logical Drive lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes v CHL ID 46 Primary Controller Cc ary Controller C y Controller C Logical Volume jary Controller E me List The LUN table is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns m CHL ID 46 lt Primary Control eecucece
263. s on page D 1 for advice about keeping a written record of your configuration before saving or restoring configuration files See Save NVRAM to Disk and Restore From Disk on page D 8 for a convenient place to keep records whenever you save or restore configuration files Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Caution Before restoring a configuration file be certain that the configuration file you apply matches the array to which you apply it If host IDs logical drive controller assignments or other controller dependent configuration information described in the Chapter 6 has changed since the configuration file was saved you might lose access to mismatched channels or drives You have to change cabling or host or drive channel IDs to correct this mismatch and restore the access you have lost On host Solaris workstations the address of the RAID controller channel must also match what is described in etc vfstab Note In the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service program you can save a configuration file that can restore all configurations and rebuild all logical drives However it also erases all data when it rebuilds the logical drives so this operation should be performed only when no data has been stored or after all data has been transferred to another array To restore configuration settings from a saved NVRAM file perform the following steps 1 Choose system Functions
264. s 0 0 15 1 16 31 2 32 47 3 48 63 4 64 79 5 80 95 6 96 111 7 112 125 For an example of properly configured loop IDs consider the configurations shown in FIGURE 4 18 and FIGURE 4 19 You need to make sure the RAID array and each of the two expansion units have been assigned different loop IDs Set the loop ID Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 27 switches so that the RAID array is assigned loop ID 0 expansion unit 1 has loop ID 1 and expansion unit 2 has loop ID 2 The range of IDs assigned to the drives is shown in TABLE 4 6 TABLE 4 6 Sample Array and Expansion Units With Different Loop IDs and Drive IDs Fibre Channel Device Loop ID Switch Setting Range of Drive IDs RAID array 0 0 15 Expansion unit 1 1 16 31 Expansion unit 2 2 32 47 Prepare the plastic left ear cap for replacement by aligning the inside round notches of the cap with the round cylindrical posts ball studs on the ear Push the top and bottom of the ear cap onto the ear pressing in on the top side toward the center of the array first Continue pushing the top and bottom of the ear cap onto the ear pressing on the side toward the outside of the array Do not use force when placing a cap on an ear Lift the bezel into position and press it onto the front of the chassis until it is flush with the front Use the key to lock both bezel locks 4 12 Connecting Ports to Hosts In a default array configuration
265. sS amp o SUN microsystems Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array with SATA Sun Microsystems Inc www sun com Part No 816 7300 16 May 2004 Revision 01 Submit comments about this document at http Avww sun com hwdocs feedback Copyright 2004 Dot Hill Systems Corporation 6305 El Camino Real Carlsbad California 92009 USA All rights reserved Sun Microsystems Inc and Dot Hill Systems Corporation may have intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in this product or document In particular and without limitation these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U S patents listed at http www sun com patents and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U S and other countries This product or document is distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors if any Third party software is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers Parts of the piven may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems licensed from the University of California UNIX is a registered trademark in the U S and in other countries exclusively licensed through X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo Sun Sto
266. saser keal i O DRIVE DRIVE Ofc29 Ofc39 L FC2 g LFO 5 THO CACHE IN Ta R Host port FC4 Host port FCO Host port FC1 Host port FC5 FIGURE 4 14 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Default Single Controller SFP Placement In a default Sun StorEdge 3510 FC expansion unit SFPs are initially plugged into the left most port of the upper I O expansion module and right most port of the lower I O expansion module see FIGURE 4 15 TOP SLOT LOOP A Co p Bottom sLoT LOOP B DRIVE voor L LINK S SPEED LINK ON 2GB ON NO LINK OFF 1GB_ OFF ACTIVITY 5 FC CONNECTOR LEDS W S TOP SLOT LOOP A BOTTOM SLOT LOOP B DRIVE LOOP L LINK S SPEED LINK ON 2GB ON NO LINK OFF 1GB OFF FC CONNECTOR LEDS P activity Default SFP Placement FIGURE 4 15 Sun StorEdge 3510 JBOD Expansion Unit Default SFP Placement Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 17 In a default Sun StorEdge 3511 FC expansion unit SFPs are initially plugged into the left most Loop A port in the upper I O expansion module and in the left most Loop B port in the lower I O expansion module FIGURE 4 16 2 GB ONLY pave Loora CAO OAO OBO B a ee 2 G
267. se Set IP Address IP Address Type in the desired IP address subnet mask and gateway address choosing each menu option in turn If your network sets IP addresses using a RARP server simply type RARP rather than an IP address and do not type in a subnet mask or gateway address If your network sets IP addresses using a DHCP server simply type DHCP rather than an IP address and do not type in a subnet mask or gateway address Press Esc to continue A confirmation prompt is displayed Change Set IP Address Choose Yes to continue Note You must reset the controller for the configuration to take effect You are prompted to reset the controller Choose Yes to reset the controller The controller takes a few minutes to format a small storage sector on each physical drive before logical drives can be successfully initialized 4 9 4 20 Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet The controller Ethernet port offers interactive out of band management through two interfaces m The Sun StorEdge Configuration Service application Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for details m The Sun StorEdge Command Line Interface CLI Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for details m The firmware application you access when you use the telnet command to connect to the IP address of the controller Sun StorEdge 3000 Family
268. ss than 7 24 online applications availability is an option This includes e Database the below near line applications Decision Support e Information lifecycle management Data warehousing e Content addressable storage e Electronic commerce e Backup and restore e Enterprise resource planning e Secondary SAN storage e Messaging file and print e Near line DAS storage e Static reference data storage Disks Fibre Channel disks SATA disks 36 73 or 146 GB at 10k rpm 250 GB at 7200 rpm 36 or 73 GB at 15k rpm 1 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 1 1 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Comparison of Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array Features Continued Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array Maximum FC Host Ports per I O Controller Module 4 one SFP port each for channels 0 1 4 and 5 6 two SFP ports each for channels 1 and 0 one SFP port each for channels 4 and 5 Maximum Number of Expansion Units Connected to a RAID Array Maximum Number of Disks per Configuration 108 1 RAID array 8 expansion units 5 72 1 RAID array 5 expansion units Maximum Number of Logical Drives 8 logical drives 8 logical drives Maximum Total Storage 15 75 TB 18 0 TB Capacity Maximum Usable Storage 14 0 TB RAID 5 14 0 TB RAID 5 Capacity 15 1 TB RAID 0 16 0 TB Raid 0 JBOD Array Support Ll One JBOD per server Configurations Not supported Sun StorEdge
269. stem Functions Reset controller and choose Yes to reset the controller or m Power off the array Wait five seconds and power on the array 7 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to check the logical drive and physical drive status After resetting the controller if there is a false bad drive the array automatically starts rebuilding the failed logical drive If the array does not automatically start rebuilding the logical drive check the status under view and edit Logical drives m If the status is FAILED DRV manually rebuild the logical drive refer to Manual Rebuild on page 9 6 m If the status is still FATAL FAIL you might have lost all data on the logical drive and it might be necessary to re create the logical drive Proceed with the following procedures a Replace the failed drive Refer to Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide for more information b Delete the logical drive Refer to Deleting Logical Drives on page 6 19 for more information c Create a new logical drive See Creating Logical Drives on page 6 21 for more information Note As physical drives fail and are replaced the rebuild process regenerates the data and parity information that was on the failed drive However the NVRAM configuration file that was present on the drive is not re created After the rebuild process is complete restore your configuration using the procedure described in Restoring Your
270. t channels can be reassigned as drive channels to connect to expansion units Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array channels 3 and 4 can also be reassigned as drive channels m Channels 2 and 3 are dedicated drive channels that connect the internal 12 disk drives in the RAID chassis and can also be used to add expansion chassis to the configuration m FC AL is the default mode Point to point is also available The Sun StorEdge 3510 expansion unit has a total of four FC AL ports The Sun StorEdge 3511 expansion unit has a total of eight FC AL ports Note Throughout this manual Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loops are referred to simply as loops See chapter 4 for detailed host and drive channel information Chapter 1 Product and Architecture Overview 1 11 1 5 1 Redundant Configuration Considerations This section provides information about setting up redundant configurations for increased reliability For more detailed information about configuration requirements refer First Time Configuration on page 6 1 and to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual 1 5 1 1 Host Bus Adapters Fibre Channel is widely applied to storage configurations with topologies that aim to avoid loss of data because of component failure As a rule the connections between source and target should be configured in redundant pairs The recommended host side connection consists of two or more host bus adapters HBAs Each HBA is used to configure a
271. tallation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER 2 Site Planning This chapter outlines the site planning requirements and basic safety requirements for the installation and use of the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays Complete a preinstallation worksheet and prepare the site for installation according to the worksheet details and the specified site planning requirements Review the details of this chapter before installing a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array Topics covered in this chapter are Customer Obligations on page 2 2 Safety Precautions on page 2 2 Environmental Requirements on page 2 3 Electrical and Power Specifications on page 2 4 Physical Specifications on page 2 5 Layout Map on page 2 5 Console and Other Requirements on page 2 7 Preinstallation Worksheet on page 2 7 Note The release notes for your array list the supported operating environments host platforms software and qualified cabinets 2 1 2 1 Customer Obligations The customer is obliged to inform Sun Microsystems Inc of any and all ordinances and regulations that would affect installation Caution When selecting an installation site for the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array choose a location that avoids excessive heat direct sunlight dust or chemical exposure Such exposure greatly reduces the product s longevity and might void your warranty The
272. tation A null modem serial cable is included in your package contents Set the serial port parameters on the workstation as follows 38 400 baud 8 bit 1 stop bit No parity For platform specific details see the appendix that describes the operating system your server uses 4 8 A Setting an IP Address To access the array using the Ethernet port you must set up an IP address for the controller You can set the IP address by typing in values for the IP address itself the subnet mask and the IP address of the gateway manually If your network is using a Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP server or a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server to automatically configure IP information for devices on the network you can specify the appropriate protocol instead of typing in the information manually Caution If you assign an IP address to an array to manage it out of band for security reasons make sure that the IP address is on a private network rather than a publicly routable network To set the IP address subnet mask and gateway address of the RAID controller perform the following steps 1 Access the array through the COM port on the I O Controller module Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 19 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Communication Parameters Internet Protocol TCP IP Choose the chip hardware address Choo
273. tery 8 2 date code 8 2 description 1 7 shelf life 8 2 when to change 8 2 Battery Operation 8 2 baud rate 4 19 F 3 beep codes muting 8 4 bus adapter connecting to 4 28 C cables customer provided 3 5 standard package 3 5 8 25 cabling cables supplied 3 3 Ethernet connection 4 20 procedures 4 1 RS 232 connection 4 19 to expansion units B 8 cache options 5 5 CD supplied 1 13 channels default channels 6 5 drive 4 11 host 4 11 host or drive 6 5 checking package contents 3 3 status windows 8 6 clearances to allow 2 5 COM port connecting to 4 19 connection F 2 G 2 COM port connection J 3 COM port parameters F 2 G 3 H 2 I 2 I 4 J 2 J 5 communication parameters 4 19 concurrent rebuild 9 7 configuration key steps 5 6 minimum requirements 6 16 overview 5 6 Index 1 restoring from a file 8 20 serial port connection F 1 G 2 J 2 K 2 Configuring Sun server running the Solaris operating environment F 1 configuring Linux server H 1 out of band management 4 20 Windows 2000 server or Windows 2000 Advanced server G 1 Windows NT server B 1 C 1 K 1 connecting an expansion unit B 8 chassis to an AC power outlet 4 7 chassis to DC power outlets 4 8 fibre channel array 4 1 ports to hosts 4 28 SFPs to SFP Ports 4 18 SFPs to SFP ports B 10 connection in band 5 6 controller assignment 6 28 failover 9 2 failure 9 2 9 3 limitations 5 2 name 6
274. th the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array deleting logical drives is required so you can create logical drives that support redundancy Caution This operation erases all data on the logical drive Therefore if any data exists on the logical drive it must be copied to another location before deleting the current logical drive Note You can delete a logical drive only if it has first been unmapped To first unmap and then delete a logical drive perform the following steps 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns A window displays a list of channel and host IDS 2 Choose a channel and host ID combination from the list and press Return A list of host LUNs that are assigned to the selected channel host combination is displayed 3 Select a host LUN from the displayed list and press Return A confirmation message asks if you want to unmap the host LUN you have selected 4 Choose Yes to unmap the host LUN from the channel host ID lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN LU LD DRU Partition Size lt MB gt RAID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes 6 LD 1 6 9580 RAIDi kd CHL 4 ID 45 Secondary Contr CHL 5 ID 47 Primary Control Yes No Edit Host ID WWN Name List eceuncce 5 Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 to unmap all remaining host LUNs that are mapped to the logical drive you want to delete 6 Press Escape to return to the Main
275. that you have performed the necessary procedures For information about different operating environment procedures refer to m Appendix F Configuring a Sun Server Running the Solaris Operating Environment on page F 1 m Appendix G Configuring a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server on page G 1 m Appendix H Configuring a Linux Server on page H 1 m Appendix I Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment on page I 1 m Appendix J Configuring an HP Server Running the HP UX Operating Environment on page J 1 m Appendix K Configuring a Windows NT Server on page K 1 13 Reset the controller Configuration is complete Note Resetting the controller can result in occasional host side error messages such as parity error and synchronous error messages No action is required and the condition corrects itself as soon as reinitialization of the controller is complete 14 Save the configuration to a disk See Saving Configuration NVRAM to a Disk on page 6 52 15 Make sure that the cabling from the RAID array to the hosts is complete Note You can reset the controller after each step or at the end of the configuration process Caution Avoid using in band and out of band connections at the same time to manage the array Otherwise conflicts between multiple operations can cause unexpected results 5 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installatio
276. the parameters described there To access the array through an Ethernet connection perform the steps in Setting an IP Address on page 4 19 To access the command prompt described there from a Windows NT server perform this step Choose Programs Command Prompt K 3 Enabling a Windows NT Server to Recognize New Devices and LUNs Before beginning this procedure make sure that your system has been upgraded with Service Pack 2 or higher Before beginning this procedure make sure that you are using a supported FC HBA such as a QLogic QLA2310 or QLogic QLA2342 Refer to the release notes for your array for current information about which HBAs are supported Also make sure that you are using a supported driver for your HBA For the QLA2310 or QLA2342 use driver version 8 1 5 12 or later Note When the Microsoft Windows operating system recognizes the Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array s SCSI Enclosure Services SES processor and identifies it as a SE3510 or SE3511 Enclosure it might prompt you to supply a driver This is standard plug and play behavior when unknown devices are encountered but no device driver is necessary If you see this prompt simply click Cancel If you have multiple arrays you might see this prompt more than once Each time you see this prompt click Cancel Boot your system and verify that the HBA basic input output system BIOS recognizes your new FC device Appendix K Configur
277. the File System Manually on page J 10 a Mounting the File System Automatically on page J 11 m Determining the World Wide Name for HP UX Hosts on page J 12 J J 2 Setting Up a Serial Port Connection The RAID controller can be configured by means of a host system running a VT100 terminal emulation program or by a Microsoft Windows terminal emulation program such as Hyperterminal If you are planning to access your array over an IP network or through a terminal server and only want to connect through a serial port for the initial configuration of the array it is not necessary to configure a serial port connection from your HP host For convenience installers frequently perform the initial array configuration using a serial port on a portable computer If you want to use a Microsoft Windows portable computer for this initial array configuration see Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page G 2 for Windows 2000 systems or Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page K 2 for Windows NT systems If you prefer to connect through a serial port on your HP server consult the hardware information for your HP host system to locate a serial port you can use for configuring the Sun StorEdge disk array The system documentation also tells you what device file to use to access that port Then set the serial port parameters on the server See Configuring a COM Port to Connect to a RAID Array on page 4 19 for the
278. the ID number 4 Reattach the plastic ear cap and the bezel on the front of the chassis B 7 Connecting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays You can connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array directly to a host server Use your standard host system disk management utilities for management of disks in a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array such as partitioning and formatting Refer to your host system documentation for more information about disk management There are two ways to verify that you have a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array or expansion unit rather than a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC RAID array m Check the back panel The back panel of the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD resembles the back panel shown in FIGURE B 2 m Remove the front bezel and look at the labels on the bottom lip of the chassis If you have a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array one label contains this designation 3510 AC JBOD alternating current model or 3510 DC JBOD direct current model Appendix B Using a Standalone JBOD Array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Only B 7 B 7 1 Single Port Connection to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Array You can connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array to an FC port a port on a single port HBA or a single port on a dual port HBA FIGURE B 2 shows an example of a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD array with 12 drives connected to a host computer over a single loop to a single FC port In this example the port is one of a pair of ports on a du
279. the drive you selected s1ot AE ID Size lt MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID Revision Number 6349 36 753FSUN36G Serial Number 3HX YEJTO0007349 Disk Capacity blocks gt 71132958 36753FSUN36G Node Name lt WWNN gt 26 66 HA BC 50 33 2B FD Redundant Loop ID 6 36753FSUN36G StorEdge 351 F A 6 1 3 Configuring FC Channels as a Host or Drive Channel Optional Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC RAID arrays are preconfigured when they arrive from the factory Channel settings and rules are a Default channel settings Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 5 a CH 0 CH 1 CH 4 and CH 5 Host channels a CH 2 and CH 3 Drive channels m On both the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays channels 2 and 3 CH 2 and CH 3 are dedicated drive channels m On the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array channels 0 1 4 and 5 can be host or drive channels On the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array channels 4 and 5 can be host or drive channels The most common reason to change a host channel to a drive channel is to attach expansion units to a RAID array m On the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array only channels 0 and 1 are dedicated host channels To change a host channel to a drive channel reconfigure the channel according to the following procedure 1 From the Main Menu choose view and edit Scsi channels Channel information is displayed lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives
280. the length of the DC power cable as needed strip the last 1 4 inch of the cable insert the stripped end into a provided Panduit tube and crimp the tube 3 Tighten the cable locking screws to attach the cable securely to the power supply power outlet 4 Connect the second power cable to the second power supply and to a second power outlet Tighten the cable locking screws If one power supply fails the second power supply automatically takes the full load Chapter 4 Connecting Your Fibre Channel Array 4 9 4 5 Powering Up and Checking LEDs Perform the initial check of the array according to the following procedure 1 Connect two AC or DC power cables to the power and fan modules on the back of the array 2 Power on the array by turning on each power switch See Power On Sequence on page 4 29 for the power up sequence to use when operating RAID arrays and expansion units See Connecting Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays on page B 7 for the power up sequence to use when operating standalone Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBODs directly attached to hosts 3 Check for the following LED activity All front panel LEDs turn solid green to indicate good operation FIGURE 4 6 Front Panel of the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Array With LEDs Displayed 4 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 See the chapter
281. the logical configurations to host channel IDs and LUNs I O requests from a host computer are directed to the primary or the secondary controller accordingly The total drive capacity can be grouped into several logical drives and assigned to both controllers so that they share the workload This active to active configuration engages all array resources to actively maximize performance An active to standby configuration is also available but is not usually selected By assigning all the logical drives to one controller the other controller stays idle and becomes active only if its counterpart fails Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 3 5 1 3 Single Controller Considerations In a single controller configuration it is important to review the following guidelines In a single controller configuration keep the controller as the primary controller at all times and assign all logical drives to the primary controller The primary controller controls all logical drive and firmware operations In a single controller configuration the controller must be the primary controller or the controller cannot operate The secondary controller is used only in dual controller configurations for redistributed I O and for failover Do not disable the Redundant Controller setting and do not set the controller as a secondary controller Caution If you disable the Redundant Controller setting and reconfigure the controller with the Autoconfigure
282. tic caps are removed in the same way a Squeeze both sides of the cap at the top and the bottom b Turn the cap toward the center of the array until it disengages and pull it free Placing the Bezel and Ear Caps Back Onto the Chassis Each plastic cap is replaced in the same way but be sure to place the cap with LED labels on the right ear Align the inside round notches of the cap with the round cylindrical posts ball studs on the ear Push the top and bottom of the ear cap onto the ear pressing in on the top side toward the center of the array first Continue pushing the top and bottom of the ear cap onto the ear pressing on the side toward the outside of the array Do not use force when placing a cap on an ear Caution Be careful to avoid compressing the reset button under the plastic cap when you replace the plastic cap on the chassis Insert the bezel arms into the chassis holes Lift the bezel into position and press it onto the front of the chassis until it is flush with the front Use the key to lock both bezel locks Chapter 8 Maintaining Your Array 8 27 8 28 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER 9 Troubleshooting Your Array This chapter covers the following maintenance and troubleshooting topics RAID LUNs Not Visible to the Host on page 9 2 Controller Failover on page 9 2 Rebuilding Logical Drives o
283. tion Pin No Description Color 1 TX White with orange 2 TX Orange 3 RX White with green 4 Blue 5 White with blue E 1 TABLEE 1 Ethernet RJ 45 Pin Description Continued Pin No Description Color 6 RX Green 7 White with brown 8 Brown E 2 DB9 COM port The COM port is a female DB9 connector that requires a male DB9 null modem cable 00800000 6080 9 FIGURE E 2 RS 232 DB9 EIA TIA 574 View of the Male End TABLE E 2 Pin Names Pin No Name Notes Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 2 RD Receive Data also called RxD Rx 3 TD Transmit Data also called TxD Tx 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 SGND Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 RTS Request To Send 8 CTS Clear To Send 9 RI Ring Indicator E 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX F Configuring a Sun Server Running the Solaris Operating Environment This appendix provides access information and LUN setup information needed when you connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC Array to a Sun server running the Solaris operating environment For a list of supported adapters refer to the release notes for your array This information supplements the configuration steps presented in this manual and covers the following topics Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page F 1 Accessing the Firmware Application From a Solaris Host on page F 2 Redefining the Baud
284. tion refer to the Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 Installation and User s Guide for Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows NT for detailed instructions about setting up the device driver on the server and for additional information about configuring your Windows 2000 Server or Advanced Server Customers interested in Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 for multiplatform support should contact Sun Sales or visit http www sun com sales For more information about multiplatform support see http www sun com storage san multiplatform_support html The information in this appendix supplements the configuration steps presented in Chapter 6 and covers the following steps m Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page G 2 m Accessing the Firmware Application From a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server on page G 5 G 1 a Enabling a Windows 200x Server or Windows 200x Advanced Server to Recognize New Devices and LUNs on page G 5 m Determining the World Wide Name for Windows 200x Servers and Windows 200x Advanced Servers on page G 10 G 1 Setting Up the Serial Port Connection The RAID controller can be configured by means of a host system running a VT100 terminal emulation program or by a Microsoft Windows terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal Note You can also monitor and configure a RAID array over an IP network using the RAID firmware or Sun StorEdge Configuration Service so
285. tion 2 FIGURE 6 5 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs 6 36 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 Channel 3 ID 1 5 GB LUN 0 LON 1 548 LUN 2 2GB Logical drive 0 Partition 2 Logical drive 1 Partition 1 Logical drive 0 Partition 0 6 2 1 6 2 2 Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only If you want to create 1024 LUNs which is the maximum number of storage partitions that can be mapped for a RAID array you must map 32 IDs to the array s channels There are several ways you can meet this requirement For example you can set up the following configuration m Use four default host channels CH 0 1 4 and 5 m Create eight host IDs per host channel four primary controller IDs and four secondary controller IDs per host channel for a total of 32 host IDs See Editing and Creating Additional Host IDs Optional on page 6 8 m Create eight logical drives See Creating Logical Drives on page 6 21 m Partition each logical drive into 128 partitions 8 x 128 1024 Map the 1024 partitions to the 32 host IDs See Partitioning a Logical Drive Optional on page 6 31 and Using the Map Host LUN Option on page 6 37 TABLE6 8 Configuration for 1024 LUNs Configuration Item Number Maximum number of host channels 4 channels 0 1 4 5 Required number of host IDs per channel 8 4 PIDs and 4 SIDs Maximum number of logi
286. tion Service User s Guide for in band setup procedures Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter Provides event monitoring and notification Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Diagnostic Reporter User s Guide for more information Sun StorEdge Command Line Interface CLI A command line interface utility that provides script based management Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for CLI information For details on how to install Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter or Sun StorEdge CLI software refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Sun StorEdge Configuration Service supports the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array It also supports to a limited degree standalone Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays Since standalone JBOD arrays do not have a RAID controller to manage the disks this software support for JBODs is limited to the following functions m viewing component and alarm characteristics m upgrading firmware on hard drives m upgrading firmware on SAF TE devices Refer to the Monitoring JBODs appendix in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide for information about using these functions with JBOD arrays B 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 B 5 1 1 B 5 2 B 5 3 Enabling
287. tion see Summary of Array Configuration on page 5 6 For more information about logical drives spare drives and RAID levels refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array Completing Basic Configuration In a point to point configuration the last required step is mapping the logical drives to host LUNs In loop mode you have additional options to pursue if needed in addition to the mapping requirement m Optionally define any additional partitions for each logical drive See Partitioning a Logical Drive Optional on page 6 31 m Optionally add host FC IDs and more logical drives to create 1024 LUNs See a Planning for 1024 LUNs Optional Loop Mode Only on page 6 37 a Editing and Creating Additional Host IDs Optional on page 6 8 m Creating Logical Drives on page 6 21 For the procedure on the required mapping to LUNs see Using the Map Host LUN Option on page 6 37 6 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 1 10 Note Alternatively you can use the graphical user interface described in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service User s Guide to map partitions and logical drives to host LUNs Preparing for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte The Solaris operating environment requires drive geometry for various operations including newfs For the appropriate drive geometry to be presente
288. torEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide All FRUs are hot swappable except the I O controller and I O expansion modules which are hot serviceable Hot serviceable means that the module can be replaced while the array and hosts are powered up but the connected hosts must be inactive TABLE 3 1 List of Available Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array FRUs FRU Model Number Description F370 5535 01 F370 5545 01 F370 5540 01 F370 5537 01 F370 5538 01 F370 5398 01 XTA 3310 DC Kit XTA 3510 36GB 15K XTA 3510 73GB 10K XTA 3510 146GB 10K XTA 3510 Ctrl 1G XTA 3000 AMBS XTA 3310 RK 19S XTA 3310 RK 19L XTA 3310 RK 19C XTA 3310 RK 19F XSFP LW 2GB XSFP SW 2GB BOX 2U FC Chassis Backplane RAID JBOD BATTERY FC 2U CABLE FC 1 5 FT EXPANSION I O w SES amp RAID CONT FC 1 GB MEMORY BATTERY 2U I O w SES JBOD FC 2U AC PWR SUPPLY FAN MOD 2U DC PWR SUPPLY FAN MOD 2U DRIVE MOD 36 GB FC 15KRPM DRIVE MOD 73 GB FC 10KRPM DRIVE MOD 146 GB FC 10KRPM I O w SES amp RAID CONT FC 1 GB MEMORY BATTERY 2U AIR MANAGEMENT SLED RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET 22 28 RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET 287 36 RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET TELCO CENTER MNT RACK KIT 2U 19 CABINET TELCO FRONT MNT SFP 2G LW 1310NM FC TRANS SFP 2G SW 850NM FC TRANS 3 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 3 2 List of Available Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array FRUs FRU Model Number Description
289. torEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 3D Front panel LEDs problem FC Verify the air conditioning is working properly Fix if needed Temp LED Resolved Yes End No gt Ensure adequate ventilation FIGURE 9 8 Front Panel LEDs FLowchart 4 of 4 Notes 55 degrees Celsius equals 131 degrees Fahrenheit Prior to replacing a chassis try the following Reseat the FRU that is not operating correctly Swap the questionable FRU with a known good FRU from the same array Resolved Yes ew No v Check that LED ribbon cable in right ear is not loose Resolved Yes End No v Replace controller that reported over temperature error Resolved Yes End Replace chassis Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 23 9 9 4 I O Controller Module The following flowchart provides troubleshooting procedures for the I O controller module 9 24 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 4A I O controller module problem FC SFP Link LED amber RAID controller status amber Battery LED solid amber No End Yes gt Yes P Replace Replace Tya Replace I O SFP with known m gt m gt known good gt good SFP the cab
290. un StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 APPENDIX K Configuring a Windows NT Server This appendix provides platform specific host installation and configuration information to use when you connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array to a host running the Windows NT Server operating system The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Arrays support Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 6A or greater in either single path or dual path configurations Dual path configurations use the Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 for Microsoft Windows NT If you are going to use dual path instead of single path configurations see the Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 Installation and User s Guide for Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows NT for detailed instructions about setting up the device driver on the server and for additional information about configuring your Windows NT server Customers interested in Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager 3 0 for multiplatform support should contact Sun Sales or visit http www sun com sales For more information about multiplatform support see http www sun com storage san multiplatform_support html The information in this appendix supplements the configuration steps presented in Chapter 6 and covers the following steps m Setting Up the Serial Port Connection on page K 2 m Accessing the Firmware Application From a Windows NT Server on page K 5 m Enabling a Wi
291. underneath the left chassis ear an ID switch is used to set loop IDs for the disk drives to different ranges of values Press to change the ID number FIGURE B 1 ID Switch By default the ID switch on all Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD arrays is set to 0 so the range of IDs is automatically 0 to 11 for 12 drives the IDs 12 15 are ignored You can leave the ID switch set to 0 or set it for whichever range of IDs you prefer The ID switch offers eight ID ranges Each set contains 16 IDs The last 4 IDs in each range are ignored These ranges are shown in TABLE B 2 TABLE B 2 ID Switch Settings for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD Arrays ID Switch Setting Range of IDs 0 0 15 1 16 31 32 47 48 63 64 79 80 95 96 111 N FD FF A QO N 112 125 B 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 B 6 1 AN Changing Your ID Switch Setting Perform the following steps to change your ID switch setting Remove the bezel the front faceplate See Replacing the Front Bezel and Ear Caps on page 8 26 for step by step instructions for removing and replacing the front bezel and ear caps Caution The plastic ear covers are snap on parts that require care when you remove them If you remove the right plastic ear cap take care to avoid breaking the Reset push button directly below the ear cap 2 Remove the left plastic ear cap from the front of the chassis 3 Use the buttons to change
292. ur Fibre Channel Array This chapter describes procedures for cabling a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array and for connecting an array to power and to network devices The following topics are covered in this chapter Converting Your Front Bezel Locks So the Keys Cannot Be Removed on page 4 2 Fibre Channel Array Connections on page 4 4 a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array on page 4 5 a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array on page 4 6 Connecting the Chassis to AC Power Outlets on page 4 7 Connecting the Chassis to DC Power Outlets on page 4 8 Powering Up and Checking LEDs on page 4 10 Reviewing Channels Ports and SFPs on page 4 11 Drive Port Connectivity in a Dual Controller Array on page 4 12 Host Port Connectivity in a Dual Controller Array on page 4 13 Default SFP Placement on page 4 15 Changing Your SFP Configuration on page 4 18 Configuring a COM Port to Connect to a RAID Array on page 4 19 Setting an IP Address on page 4 19 Setting Up Out of Band Management Over Ethernet on page 4 20 Cabling to Expansion Units on page 4 22 Setting Loop IDs on Expansion Units on page 4 26 Connecting Ports to Hosts on page 4 28 Power On Sequence on page 4 29 Power Off Procedure on page 4 30 Before you connect a Sun StorEdge 3510 or 3511 FC array to the network position the array in the rack cabinet or other location where it will be us
293. ur Servers a Dual Controller Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array and Two Expansion Units 5 18 Initial Firmware Window 6 3 Firmware Main Menu 6 3 Example of an Allocation of Local and Global Spare Drives in Logical Configurations Partitions in Logical Drives 6 31 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs 6 36 Example of LUN Filtering 6 43 Front Panel LEDs 7 2 Chassis Ear LEDs and Reset Button on Front Panel 7 3 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array I O Controller Module and Battery Module LEDs 7 5 Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array I O Controller Module and Battery Module LEDs 7 5 I O Expansion Module for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Expansion Unit 7 6 I O Expansion Module for a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Expansion Unit 7 6 AC Power Supply and Fan Module 7 8 DC Power Supply and Fan Module 7 8 Cooling Fan Locations 8 18 Automatic Rebuild 9 5 Manual Rebuild 9 7 Flashing the Drive LED of a Selected Drive 9 10 Flashing All Drive LEDs to Detect a Defective Non Flashing Drive 9 10 Flashing All Drive LEDs Except a Selected Drive LED 9 11 Power Supply or Fan Module Flowchart 1 of 2 9 15 xiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 6 22 FIGURE 9 2 FIGURE 9 3 FIGURE 9 4 FIGURE 9 5 FIGURE 9 6 FIGURE 9 7 FIGURE 9 8 FIGURE 9 9 FIGURE B 1 FIGURE B 2 FIGURE B 3 FIGURE B 4 FIGURE B 5 FIGURE E 1 FIGURE E 2 FIGURE F 1 FIGURE F 2 FIGURE I 1 FIGURE l 2 FIGURE J 1 Power Supply or Fan Module
294. ur system is protected with the RAID parity drive and a global spare or spares Note A FATAL FAIL status occurs when there is one more drive failing than the number of spare drives available for the logical drive If a logical drive has two global spares available three failed drives must occur for FATAL FAIL status In the extremely rare occurrence that two or more drives appear to fail at the same time perform the following steps Discontinue all I O activity immediately To cancel the beeping alarm from the firmware Main Menu choose system Functions Mute beeper See Silencing Audible Alarms on page 8 4 for more information about silencing audible alarms Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Your Array 9 11 3 Physically check that all the drives are firmly seated in the array and that none have been partially or completely removed 4 In the firmware Main Menu choose view and edit Logical drives and look for Status FAILED DRV one failed drive Status FATAL FAIL two or more failed drives 5 Highlight the logical drive press Return and choose view scsi drives If two physical drives have a problem one drive has a BAD status and one drive has a MISSING status The MISSING status is a reminder that one of the drives might be a false failure The status does not tell you which drive might be a false failure 6 Do one of the following m From the firmware Main Menu choose sy
295. urations in a DAS Loop configuration if you connect more than one host to channel 0 or channel 1 you must use host filtering when you want to control host access to storage See Setting Up Host Filter Entries on page 6 42 for information about host filters Refer to the user documentation for your clustering software to determine whether the clustering software can manage host access in this configuration ip 5 20 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 5 4 Larger Configurations Larger configurations are possible using Sun StorEdge Fibre Channel arrays and additional expansion units m Up to eight expansion units are supported when connected to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array m Up to five expansion units are supported when connected to a Sun StorEdge 3511 FC array A number of configurations are possible For more detailed information and for suggestions about the most appropriate configurations for your applications and environment refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for your array Chapter 5 Configuration Overview 5 21 5 22 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 CHAPTER 6 First Time Configuration This chapter summarizes the most common procedures used for first time configuration This chapter covers the following topics m Initial Configuration Steps on page 6 2 Viewing the Initial Fir
296. y Configuration Options 1 4 Environmental Specifications 2 3 Power Specifications 2 4 Physical Specifications 2 5 Preinstallation Worksheet 2 8 Host and Fabric Switch Connectivity Summarized 2 9 List of Available Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array FRUs 3 4 List of Available Sun StorEdge 3511 FC Array FRUs 3 5 DC Cable Wiring for Cable 35 00000148 4 9 DC Cable Wiring for Cable 35 00000156 4 9 Number of Ports in the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC Arrays 4 11 Number of Host Ports and Supported Host Port Speeds 4 14 ID Switch Settings for Expansion Units 4 27 Sample Array and Expansion Units With Different Loop IDs and Drive IDs 4 28 Example Point to Point Configuration With Two Logical Drives in a Dual Controller Array 5 15 Connection for Four Servers in a DAS Configuration 5 16 Example Primary and Secondary ID Numbers in a Loop Configuration With Two IDs per Channel 5 20 Default Host Channel IDs 6 9 xvii TABLE 6 2 TABLE 6 3 TABLE 6 4 TABLE 6 5 TABLE 6 6 TABLE 6 7 TABLE 6 8 TABLE 7 1 TABLE 7 2 TABLE 7 3 TABLE 7 4 TABLE 8 1 TABLE 8 2 TABLE 8 3 TABLE 8 4 TABLE 8 5 TABLE 8 6 TABLE 8 7 TABLE A 1 TABLE B 1 TABLE B 2 TABLE B 3 TABLE B 4 TABLE C 1 TABLE E 1 TABLE E 2 Maximum Number of Disks per Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Logical Drive 6 13 Maximum Usable Capacity Gbyte per Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array Logical Drive 6 13 Maximum Number of Disks per Sun StorEdge 3511 F
297. you have on the devices 8 2 1 Battery Operation The battery LED on the far right side of the I O controller module is amber if the battery is bad or missing The LED blinks green if the battery is charging and is solid green when the battery is fully charged Battery Status Battery status is displayed at the top of the initial firmware screen BAT status displays somewhere in the range from BAD to charging to fully charged For maximum life lithium ion batteries are not recharged until the charge level is very low indicated by a status of Automatic recharging at this point takes very little time A battery module whose status shows one or more signs can support cache memory for 72 hours As long as one or more signs are displayed your battery is performing correctly 8 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual May 2004 TABLE 8 1 Battery Status Indicators Battery Display Description soar Discharged the battery is automatically recharged when it reaches this state Adequately charged to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss Automatic recharging occurs when the battery status drops below this level 90 charged adequate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss 92 charged adequate to maintain cache memory for 72 hours or more in case of power loss 95 charged adequ
298. ype the values you want to use for the other parameters on the Add a Logical Volume screen or accept the default values When the logical volume is created a status screen displays Command OK and displays the name of the new logical volume I 7 Creating a File System The following steps create a file system on the new logical volume 1 Return to the System Storage Management Physical and Logical Storage screen The System Storage Management screen is displayed 2 Choose File Systems from the System Storage Management menu to display the File Systems screen 3 Choose Add Change Show Delete File Systems from the File Systems menu Appendix Configuring an IBM Server Running the AIX Operating Environment l 7 Choose Journaled File System to display the Journaled File System screen Choose Add a Journaled File System from the Journaled File System menu Choose Add a Standard Journaled File System to display the Volume Group Name screen The Volume Group Name screen displays the names of available volume groups Move the cursor to highlight the name of the volume group you created in Creating a Volume Group on page I 6 The Add a Standard Journaled File System screen is displayed Specify the size of the file system you want to create by typing the number of blocks you want next to SIZE of file system in 512 byte blocks Next to MOUNT POINT type the directory name and path if des
299. ys The flexible architecture of the Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC arrays makes many configurations possible 5 1 5 1 Olek B12 Controller Defaults and Limitations This section describes default configurations and certain controller limitations Planning for Reliability Availability and Serviceability The Sun StorEdge 3510 and 3511 FC array entry level configurations include only one controller You can mirror two single controller arrays using volume manager software on attached servers to ensure high reliability availability and serviceability RAS You can also use dual controller arrays to avoid a single point of failure A dual controller array features a default active to active controller configuration This configuration provides high reliability and high availability because in the unlikely event of a controller failure the array automatically fails over to a second controller resulting in no interruption of data flow Other dual controller configurations can be used as well For instance at a site where maximum throughput or connecting to the largest possible number of servers is of primary importance you could use a high performance configuration Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Best Practices Manual for information about array configurations Be aware however that departing from a high availability configuration can result in a significant decrease in the mean time between data interruptions Syst
300. zeCMB Partition Offset lt MB gt Size lt MB gt NAME 28E4a83F Na RAIDi 3447 eee 3447 Partition Size MB gt 20000 A warning prompt is displayed This operation will result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA on the partition Partition Logical Drive Caution Make sure any data that you want to save on this partition has been backed up before you partition the logical drive Chapter 6 First Time Configuration 6 33 6 34 7 Choose Yes to confirm The remaining capacity of the logical drive is automatically allotted to the next partition In the following figure a partition size of 20000 MB was entered the remaining storage of 14476 MB is allocated to the partition below the newly created partition Partition oFfeet lt HB gt Size lt MB gt O TTT i 3 4 5 6 7 20000 14476 Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to partition the remaining capacity of your logical drive You can create up to 128 partitions per logical drive with a total number of partitions not to exceed 1024 partitions per RAID array including expansion units Note When you modify a partition or logical drive size you must reconfigure all host LUN mappings All the host LUN mappings are removed with any change to partition capacity See Using the Map Host LUN Option on page 6 37 Note When a partition of a logical drive or logical volume is deleted the capacity of th

Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation, Operation, and Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents